9101 User's Guide
9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer
User’s Guide
Software version 5.31
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document
was accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change without notice, and Aeroflex reserves the right to provide an
addendum to this document with information not available at the time
this document was created.
Copyright
© Copyright 2010 Aeroflex GmbH. All rights reserved. Aeroflex and its
logo are trademarks of Aeroflex Incorporated. All other trademarks and
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No
part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted electronically or
otherwise without written permission of the publisher.
Trademarks
Aeroflex is a trademark of Aeroflex Incorporated in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
Specifications, terms and conditions are subject to change without
notice. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of
their respective companies.
Ordering information
This guide is issued as part of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
The order number for a published guide is AG 290 004.
The following table shows the order numbers for the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer Product Packages. For details on the scope of
delivery for the individual editions please refer to your getting started
manual.
Table 1
Editions of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Order number
Description
AG 100 411
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Bench Edition
AG 248 800
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Field Edition
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
i
ii
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Table of Contents
About This Guide
xi
Purpose and scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Related information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Safety Notes
xv
Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Chapter 1
Overview
About the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 5.31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 5.30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 5.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 5.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 5.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 4.50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 4.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 4.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 4.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 2.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 2.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 2.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 1.54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining your unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31iii
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 2
General Operation
Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXT. REF. IN/ EXT. TRIG. connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERIAL (RS-232) connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering up the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Softkey descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backspace key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering numbers and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling in a numerical input field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling in a text input field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling and moving a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling a delta marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling a delta marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a marker on a frequency relative to marker 1 . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the center frequency with a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the reference level with the marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning the marker frequency to FStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using limit lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using simple limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching simple limits on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining upper and lower limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using limit templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting limit lines within the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating and deactivating limit templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting limit files in the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counting limit failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling a beep upon failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a failed measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
9
10
10
10
11
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
15
17
17
18
18
18
18
20
20
21
21
21
21
23
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
33
Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the 9101 from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning from remote control to local mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking installed options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the display brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling and disabling beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning a device name to the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting date and time in the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the baud rate on the RS-232 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the IP address of the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the IP address of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the IP port used by the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting user interface colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing instrument settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reusing an instrument settings name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reloading instrument settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a settings file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all intrument settings files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring factory settings for all modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving the frequency accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
36
36
36
37
38
38
39
40
42
42
43
43
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
47
Spectrum Analysis Operation
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
58
58
60
60
Selecting the measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the frequency settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting start and stop frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting center frequency and span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the main menu for different frequency parameters . .
Viewing the complete frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing measurements in the time domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the step size for the frequency input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting RBW, VBW and SWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the level parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the hardware attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the vertical scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the level unit for input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensating gains and losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling external device compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning external device compensation off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting files for external device compensation . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying special functions on the signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a limited number of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demodulating an AM or FM signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31v
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Setting up the trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the trace mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the second trace on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subtracting trace B from trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding trace B to trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the number of measurements for averaging . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the detection method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying traces inside the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and loading traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reusing a trace name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reloading a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special measurement functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occupied bandwidth (OBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the measurement type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching special measurement functions off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the channel width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the channel spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the channel power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the occupied bandwidth percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing general analyzer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the spectrum analysis mode parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
62
63
63
64
65
65
66
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
71
71
72
72
72
72
73
73
Channel Power Operation
75
About the channel power mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Channel power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Occupied bandwidth (OBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Selecting the measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operating in channel power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Reading the channel power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Changing the occupied bandwidth percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Working with communication systems and frequency settings . . . . . 81
Selecting a communication system on the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting up a new communication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Deleting a communication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Deleting all communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Undeleting default communication systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using the 9100 Data Exchange Software with communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Defining the frequency span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing the sweep time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting up the level parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting the hardware attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing the vertical scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Selecting the level unit for input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
vi
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Table of Contents
Chapter 5
Compensating gains and losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling external device compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning external device compensation off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting files for external device compensation . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the trace mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the second trace on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subtracting trace B from trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding trace B to trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the number of measurements for averaging . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the detection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying traces inside the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and loading traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reusing a trace name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reloading a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the channel power mode parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
86
87
87
87
88
88
90
90
91
91
91
92
93
93
94
94
94
94
95
Troubleshooting
97
Handling system errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Updating the Instrument Software
Entering the Setup Application Software menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a serial update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a LAN update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Host IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
100
100
101
103
104
SCPI Command Reference
105
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
General commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Commands affecting the event status register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Commands affecting the service register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
System commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sense commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Input commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
MMemory commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Instrument commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Display commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Calculate commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Format commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Service commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
SCPI errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31vii
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
9100 Data Exchange Software
167
About the 9100 Data Exchange Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Understanding the license conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Starting the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Connecting the PC to the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Using a predefined configuration for the connection . . . . . . . . . 170
Serial interface connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
LAN (TCP/IP) connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Saving the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Loading measurement results from the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Viewing the actual trace on the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Toggling the view mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Showing and hiding parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Showing and hiding markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Continually loading live traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Transferring a saved trace to the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Storing results on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Loading a trace file on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Printing measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Affecting the layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Printing a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Printing several traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Saving results to a graphics file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Saving results to a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Copying the trace into a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Graphics copy and paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Data copy and paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Creating screen shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Working with measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Change the reference level and scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Using a grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Defining and loading limit templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Defining limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Changing limit lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Displaying an example trace in the Limits Editing menu. . . . . . . 185
Storing a template on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Loading a template from the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Transferring a template to the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Defining and loading external coupling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Defining the external coupling factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Loading an external coupling loss file to the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Managing communication systems for channel power measurements .
189
Editing communication system parameters on the PC . . . . . . . .
Working with settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchanging a settings file between 9101 and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing 9101 settings on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
189
190
190
190
191
Table of Contents
File types and directory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying configuration files from the 9101 to the PC . . . . . . . . .
Deleting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9
Programming Examples
191
192
194
194
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over LAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Next Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
197
197
197
198
198
198
198
199
199
199
200
200
200
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
203
204
204
205
Appendix A
Index of SCPI Commands
207
Appendix B
Predefined Settings
211
212
213
213
214
217
Predefined measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined channel power communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preinstalled systems on the 9101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined systems in the 9100 Data Exchange Software . . . .
Predefined cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31ix
Table of Contents
Appendix C
Menu Structure
223
Mode function key menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Application menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Appendix D
Software License
227
End-user license agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Appendix E
Warranty and Repair
229
Warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Equipment return instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Publication History
x
241
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
About This Guide
– “Purpose and scope” on page xii
– “Assumptions” on page xii
– “Related information” on page xii
– “Technical assistance” on page xii
– “Conventions” on page xiii
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
xi
About This Guide
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
The purpose of this guide is to help you successfully use the 9101
Handheld Spectrum Analyzer features and capabilities. This guide
includes task-based instructions that describe how to install, configure,
use, and troubleshoot the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. Additionally, this guide provides a description of Aeroflex’s warranty,
services, license, and repair information as well as the software license
agreement.
Assumptions
This guide is intended for novice and intermediate users who want to
use the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer effectively and efficiently.
We are assuming that you are familiar with basic telecommunication
concepts and terminology.
Related information
Use this guide in conjunction with the following information:
Aeroflex 9100 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer Series: getting started
manual, order number AG 295 204
Aeroflex 9100 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer Series: applications guide,
AG 290 504
Technical assistance
If you need assistance or have questions related to the use of this
product, call Aeroflex’s support. You can also contact Aeroflex by
e-mail at [email protected]
xii
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
About This Guide
Conventions
Conventions
This guide uses naming conventions and symbols, as described in the
following tables.
Table 1
Typographical conventions
Description
Example
User interface actions appear in
this typeface.
On the Status bar, click Start.
Buttons or switches that you
press on a unit appear in this
TYPEFACE.
Press the ON switch.
Code and output messages
appear in this typeface.
All results okay
Text you must type exactly as
shown appears in this typeface.
Type: a:\set.exe in the dialog box.
Variables appear in this <typeface>.
Type the new <hostname>.
Book references appear in this
typeface.
Refer to Newton’s Telecom Dictionary
A vertical bar | means “or”: only
one option can appear in a single command.
platform [a|b|e]
Square brackets [ ] indicate an
optional argument.
login [platform name]
Slanted brackets < > group
required arguments.
<password>
Table 2
Keyboard and menu conventions
Description
Example
A plus sign + indicates simultaneous keystrokes.
Press Ctrl+s
A comma indicates consecutive
keystrokes.
Press Alt+f,s
A slanted bracket indicates
choosing a submenu from
menu.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
On the menu bar, click
Start > Program Files.
Software version 5.31
xiii
About This Guide
Conventions
Table 3
Symbol conventions
This symbol represents a general hazard.
This symbol represents a risk of electrical shock.
NOTE
This symbol represents a note indicating related information or tip.
xiv
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Safety Notes
This chapter provides the safety notes for the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
xv
Safety Notes
Safety warnings
Safety warnings
This product is designed for indoor use. As exposure to water can
damage the instrument it has to be protected against moisture when
used outdoors.
WARNING
This is a safety class A equipment in accordance with EN 61326. It
may produce radio interference affecting household equipment; the
user may be forced to execute appropriate measures against radiation.
WARNING
Only use a 50  N-type connector to connect to the RF IN port of
the 9101. Use of any other connector may result in damage of the
instrument.
WARNING
Do not cover the ventilation slits (at the bottom left-hand corner and
on the top). Covering them may result in serious damage and fire.
WARNING
The maximum input power level at the RF IN connector is 30 dBm
(1 W). Higher input levels may result in serious damage of the instrument.
WARNING
Operate the instrument within the temperature range from 5°C
(40°F) to 45°C (110°F) only. Operation outside this range will lead to
invalid results.
Safety advice for the battery
Do not crush. Do not heat or incinerate. Do not short-circuit. Do not
dismantle. Do not immerse in any liquid, it may vent or rupture! Do
not charge below 0°C (32°F) nor above 45°C (110°F).
Battery usage
The battery is for use with the 9101 only. Aeroflex does not accept
any liability for damage of the battery or other equipment if the battery is used with other electric or electronic equipment.
xvi
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 1
Overview
1
This chapter provides a general description of the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer. Topics discussed in this chapter include the
following:
– “About the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer” on page 2
– “What’s new” on page 2
– “Features and capabilities” on page 6
– “Options and accessories” on page 6
– “Physical description” on page 7
– “Maintaining your unit” on page 7
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
1
Chapter 1 Overview
About the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
About the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
The 9101 is a lightweight, full-featured spectrum analyzer for many
applications:
– Used in mobile phone repair to detect and locate faulty mobile
phone parts and components.
– Installation troubleshooting, repair and maintenance.
– Assessment and verification of electromagnetic radiation to verify
against EMI.
– Production test and alignment of the output of RF modules.
– Field measurements and verification of base station emissions.
– Used to detect and locate faulty mobile phone parts and components.
Typical measurements with the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
include transmitter testing, alignment of modulators and measuring
switch breakthrough. The analyzer is fully controllable via front panel or
by remote control from a PC.
Measurement results and instrument settings can easily be transferred
to a PC for presentation or post-processing. This rugged instrument is
suitable for stationary and mobile usage and meets many application
needs.
What’s new
2
Version 5.31
9100 in DTF mode now transmits VSWR reference level to 9100 Data
Exchange Software when necessary
Version 5.30
Firmware now shows Aeroflex logo
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 1 Overview
What’s new
Version 5.20
Supports Reference Level Offset
Temperature correction for high band corrected
Version 5.10
Supports external time base (reference frequency), shown in 9100
Data Exchange when active.
Version 5.00
New features in 9100 Data Exchange Software version 5.00
– Marker description with break-out line can be added to the trace
– Trace data or graphics can be copied to the clipboard and pasted
into a word processor or spreadsheet application
– Printout header can be defined
Version 4.50
Minor corrections.
Version 4.11
Improvements:
– Trace average function corrected.
– Too low sweep time at 200 kHz RBW now gets an UNCAL warning.
Version 4.10
New features:
– Supports 100 Hz and 300 Hz RBW filters, 10 kHz span and 250 s
sweep time in 9101B and 9102B models. Those features are not
available for older instruments.
Improvements:
– SCPI remote control bugfix for marker value.
Version 4.01
New features:
– New trace finder functionality.
For further details refer to “Trace finder” on page 17.
– Marker functionality: six markers for all measurement modes,
markers can be set on trace A and trace B.
– New look and feel of the parameter windows
– Direct printing
– New Printer Config menu
– RMS Option with RMS detector
– Frequency counter
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
3
Chapter 1 Overview
What’s new
Improvements:
– Full support of external device in the Mode window
– Improved frequency counter
– Improved Level StepDown functionality of MinValue
– Improved Color Scheme menu: eight input fields available for all
screen components
Version 3.00
New features:
– New Factory Settings function
For a description of this function refer to “Restoring factory settings
for all modes” on page 47.
– New function in the Trace Function menu: Add A + B  A.
– New functions in the Trace Function menu: Subtract A - B  A and
Add A + B  A.
For a description of these functions refer to the “Setting up the
trace” sections of in Chapter 3 “Spectrum Analysis Operation” and
Chapter 4 “Channel Power Operation”.
– New Calibration Information menu
For a description of this menu refer to “Reviewing the calibration”
on page 35.
– New password function for updating the instrument software
For a description of this function refer to “Setting a password” on
page 100 in Chapter 6 “Updating the Instrument Software”.
Improvements:
– Improved resolution bandwidth (RBW), down to 1 kHz/3 kHz
– Improved video bandwidth (VBW), down to 10 Hz/30 kHz
– Delta marker definition facilitated. Delta markers can be defined
directly via the relevant marker softkey.
For a description of the new delta marker handling procedure refer
to “Working with the markers” on page 26.
– Measure menu improved. Access to Measure menu from Spectrum
Analysis main menu.
– System information menu improved to enhance handling.
For further information refer to “Checking general settings” on
page 34.
NOTE
These features are available for serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Version 2.21
Improvements:
– Frequency offset corrected for small span (< 200 kHz) and long
sweep time (> 5 s)
4
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 1 Overview
What’s new
– Displayed battery charge corrected, automatic battery voltage
check and automatic correction of battery load during startup
process.
– Automatic switch off from video trigger to free run implemented,
when span is changed from zero span to span  100 kHz
– "Not loaded" will be displayed when no files (Limits, Channel
settings) are loaded
Version 2.20
New features:
– External device compensation
– Impedance selection 50/75 
– Low battery alarm
– Parameter screens
– Copying between traces A and B
– Marker To FStep function
– Measurement types Channel Power/ACPR/OBW within Channel
Power and Spectrum Analysis modes
– Permanent demodulation
– Limit settings file displayed
– Simple limits
– Traces and settings can be transferred to the instrument
Improvements:
– Dynamic frequency button handling changed
– Various System Information menus modified
Version 2.10
Parameter menu for channel power and spectrum analyzer mode
implemented
System menu with time and date added
Automatic sweep time calculation optimized for sweep times below
24 ms
Filter transient time improved for combination of 200 kHz span and
10 Hz video bandwidth so that measurement is calibrated
Rework of IP address input
Version 1.54
Redesigned user interface (colors, softkeys, graph)
New menu structure
AM/FM demodulation
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
5
Chapter 1 Overview
Features and capabilities
New frequency entry mode (Start/Span) (removed in version 2.20)
Channel power measurement application selectable with measurement mode key
Video trigger (positive, negative slope)
Number of single sweeps selectable
Limit lines (lines, fail count, fail beep, fail hold)
Averaging
Frequency step functionality with cursor keys
New marker handling (absolute, relative, marker to highest peak)
Sweep counter
Battery management
Features and capabilities
– Comprehensive feature set in one-button measurement
– Easy-to-read screens make all the difference in finding signals
– Speedy assessment of signal quality with marker and limit template
capabilities
– Get more out of digitally modulated signals through RMS channel
power measurement functions
– Accurate measurements in different RF environments due to
external device compensation and impedance adjustment
– Remote control via RS-232 and Ethernet
Options and accessories
The following options and acessories are available:
Table 4
Accessories for the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Order
number
6
Description
AG 248 640
1205 RF Probe 20 dB (includes N to BNC
adapter)
AG 205 012
Battery module (rechargeable, 7.2 Ah)
AG 204 097
1500 battery charger
AG 241 013
9100 soft carrying bag
AG 241 015
9100 outdoor backpack
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 1 Overview
Physical description
Table 4
Accessories for the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Order
number
Description
AG 248 328
9100 power supply
AG 860 389
9100 12 V car adapter
AG 867 037
9100 safety lock
AG 897 137
9100 Data Exchange Software
AG 860 388
9100 serial communication cable
AG 860 261
Antenna, 900 MHz band (TNC)
AG 860 262
Antenna, 1800MHz band (TNC)
AG 860 260
Antenna, 1880 MHz band (BNC)
AG 860 146
Antenna, 2400 MHz band (TNC)
AG 886 097
Adapter N (male) to BNC (female)
AG 886 098
Adapter N (male) to TNC (female)
AG 886 205
Matching pad N 50  to N 75 
AG 886 204
Matching pad N 50 to F 75 
AG 874 061
Attenuator 18 GHz, 6 dB
Physical description
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer is delivered with the 9100 Data
Exchange Software which can also be ordered separately.
The user-accessible parts of the 9101 can be broken down into several
sections:
– Front panel with large screen, softkeys, numeric, cursor and function keys.
– Connectors accessible from the top and the left-hand side of the
9101.
– On/off switch, power supply connector and battery shelf.
– Handle which can be turned in steps to serve as a stand, allowing
the 9101 to be operated at an angle.
Maintaining your unit
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer is a measurement device. As
with all such instruments, the 9101 should be calibrated on a regular
basis to ensure accuracy. Aeroflex recommends calibration of the 9101
at yearly intervals.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
7
Chapter 1 Overview
Maintaining your unit
Please take also advantage of our Frequently Asked Questions and our
electronic newsletter, both available on the Internet.
Further questions regarding the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
can be directed to [email protected]
8
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2
General Operation
2
This chapter describes the instrument’s functions that are independent
of the selected mode. Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:
– “Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer” on page 10
– “Powering up the unit” on page 13
– “Starting measurements” on page 13
– “Using the front panel” on page 13
– “Selecting the measurement mode” on page 25
– “Working with the markers” on page 26
– “Using limit lines” on page 29
– “Printing” on page 33
– “Controlling the 9101 from a PC” on page 33
– “Returning from remote control to local mode” on page 34
– “Checking general settings” on page 34
– “Working with stored settings” on page 45
– “Restoring factory settings for all modes” on page 47
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
9
Chapter 2 General Operation
Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
RF in
Figure 1
DC
IN
connector
IN
connector
DC in
9101 connectors on the top of the instrument
The 9101 can be operated either from the internal battery or from an
external DC source such as the power supply which is delivered with
the 9101. In addition, the battery is loaded when an external DC source
is connected. See the specifications in your getting started manual for
details of the required DC source. Here you will also find detailed information on installing and maintaining the battery.
Apply the source to the DC
RF
Ext. Ref. in/
Ext. Trig.
IN
connector at the top of the 9101.
RF in is a 50  N-type connector (female).
If you have a 50  shielded RF cable with an N-type connector (male)
to connect to the device under test, simply screw the connector tightly
to the 9101.
If you have a 50  shielded RF cable with a BNC connector (male), use
an N to BNC adapter to connect the cable to the 9101. Aeroflex offers
an appropriate adapter; see section “Options and accessories” on
page 6.
WARNING
The maximum allowable input power level at the RF IN connector is
30 dBm (1 W). Higher levels at this port can damage the instrument!
CAUTION
Only use a 50  N-type connector to connect to the RF IN port of
the 9101. Use of any other connector may result in damage of the
instrument.
10
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Take care of proper termination
Use of cables and sources with an impedance other than 50 
results in inaccurate measurements.
If you want to test a device with an impedance of 75 , refer to section
“Changing the input impedance” on page 56 to adapt the 9101
settings.
The link between the device under test and the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer may be attenuated, for example because the link is an
antenna or includes a power splitter, or a long cable. The effect of the
attenuation on the measurement results can be compensated by
entering the attenuation value in the 9101, see section “Compensating
gains and losses” on page 55.
EXT. REF.
IN/
EXT. TRIG.
connector
Can either be used as an input for an external time base (reference
clock) or as an input for an external trigger signal for the spectrum
analyzer sweep (an external device that triggers the measurement by
sending an impulse can be connected for example). Only one of the
two signal types can be connected at any one time.
See “Improving the frequency accuracy” on page 47 on how to make
use of the external time base input.
More on external trigger signals can be found in sections “Using a
trigger” on page 58 and on page 123.
WARNING
The EXT. TRIG. input is designed for TTL input levels only. Higher levels at this port can damage the instrument!
Note
The external time base feature is available in instruments with serial
number 5304001 or higher.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
11
Chapter 2 General Operation
Connecting the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
LAN
Serial
Figure 2
SERIAL (RS-232)
connector
9101 connectors on the left-hand side of the
instrument
This 9-pin sub-D connector on the left-hand side of the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer can be used to control the instrument remotely via
serial interface (RS-232). The command set and responses are
explained in section “SCPI Command Reference” on page 105.
Use a null modem (PC to PC) cable to connect the 9101 to a controlling
PC.
LAN connector
The 9101 can also be controlled via local area network (LAN) using a
TCP/IP connection. The LAN connector is located on the left side of the
instrument. The IP address can be set up in the System Configuration
menu or via RS-232. The 9101 can be operated in networks operating
at 100 Mbps, but is capable of transmitting and receiving at 10 Mbps
only.
The command set to control the 9101 and the responses from the
9101 are explained in section “SCPI Command Reference” on
page 105.
Connect the 9101 to the LAN with a standard LAN cable with RJ-45
connectors.
12
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Powering up the unit
Powering up the unit
The 9101 is switched on and off using the power switch located at the
top of the instrument. It takes about 55 seconds for the 9101 to load
and start its software.
Starting measurements
The 9101 starts measuring and displaying results automatically after
powering the instrument. It starts in the measurement mode last active.
Using the front panel
Overview
The front panel is divided into different sections as follows:
cursor keys
display
horizontal (menu) softkeys
Figure 3
Battery status LED
vertical (function) softkeys
function keys
numeric keys
enter keys
Front panel elements
This LED has different states:
– The LED lights green when the 9101 is being operated from its
battery and no external power is supplied.
– The LED lights yellow when the battery is connected to an external
power supply and being loaded.
– The LED is off when the loading procedure is completed, the
battery is fully loaded or when there is no battery in the 9100’s
battery compartment.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
13
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
– When the LED is flashing yellow quickly and permanently, there is a
problem with the battery or the charger. Please report this problem
to a Aeroflex service center.
NOTE
Signal level measurement results may be impaired when the battery
is low, that means when the battery has less than 10% of its nominal
capacity. See Table 5 on page 15 for an indication when the battery
is low. For a detailed description on installing and charging the battery please refer to your getting started manual.
Display
The 6.5 inch display is divided into the following sections (see
Figure 4):
– Results area
– Marker field
– Input field
– Softkey descriptions
Figure 4
14
Display sections
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Results area
Results area (graph)
The results area utilizes most of the screen and provides you with the
measurement results. A grid of ten vertical and eight horizontal rows
eases readability of results from the axes. There may be one or two
graphs, depending on the number of traces selected.
Horizontal axis
The horizontal axis is the frequency axis for the spectral components.
The zero span mode is an exception, as the horizontal axis is the time
axis in this case. The values of the frequencies at both ends of the scale
are indicated (start and stop frequencies).
Vertical axis
The vertical axis reflects the RF power. Depending on your choice of
the level unit, the RF power is indicated in dBm, dBV, dBmV, or dBμV.
The top end of the power scale is called the reference level.
Symbols (icons)
Apart from the results graph itself, several icons are available to indicate the status of the 9101 as follows:
Table 5
Symbol
Icons on the display
Meaning
The 9101 is taking its operating current from the battery. The colored area marks how much of the capacity is still available.
For 30% or more, the area is indicated in yellow; from
10% to 30%, the area is shown in red, and in white for
less than 10%. The 9101 sounds a double beep when
the capacity goes below 30% of its nominal value and
two double beeps below 10%.
The 9101 is connected to an external DC supply.
The 9101 cannot determine the battery charge
although the battery can still be used and recharged.
Please contact Aeroflex service to have your battery
checked.
The 9101 cannot determine the battery charge; typically appears during the last third of operating time of
battery operation. Please contact Aeroflex service to
have your battery checked.
The battery is not installed and the 9101 is operated
from the external power supply.
The 9101 is connected to a local area network (LAN).
A video trigger has been set at the power level indicated. The icon also displays the slope of the trigger.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
15
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Table 5
Icons on the display
Symbol
Meaning
Demodulation is switched on so that the 9101 emits
the demodulated signal at the loudspeaker.
Other screen elements
The bar to the left of the vertical axis carries some or all of the elements
shown below:
Table 6
16
Texts on the left-hand side
Text
Meaning
Ref. Level
Indicates the top-most level on the vertical (power)
axis. Can be modified with the REF function key.
dBm
dBμV
dBmV
dBV
V
mV
μV
mW
μW
dBμV/m
dBmV/m
dBV/m
V/m
mW/m2
Shows the unit in which power, is displayed. Can be
changed in the Level > Units menu. Units can be
switched between logarithmic and linear by pressing
the Units softkey.
Logarithmic units are: dBm, dBμV, dBmV, dBV, dBμV/
m, dBmV/m, dBVm.
Linear units are: V, mV, μV, mW μW, V/m, mW/m2.
HOLD
Indicates when measurements have been halted with
a press of the HOLD/RUN function key.
Count
The number following shows the progress of the measurements, that means it indicates how many measurements with the present configuration have already
been taken. The counter continues while the trace
hold mode is enabled. It is reset whenever a parameter affecting the measurements is changed, that
means frequencies, filters or attenuation.
Ext. Dev.
Indicates that the external device compensation is
turned on, that means the attenuation of any coupling
device is taken into account. The external device compensation can be set up as shown in section “Compensating gains and losses” on page 55.
UNCAL
When displayed, the filter and sweep time setting do
not permit proper measurements.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Table 6
Texts on the left-hand side
Text
Meaning
Pos./Neg.
Pos. Peak
Neg.
Peak
Sample
RMS
Shows the current detector setting. The detector can
be changed as explained in section “Selecting the
detection method” on page 65. The RMS detector is
available if the 9132 RMS Detector Option is installed
and activated on your 9101.
A/B
(ACT)
A/B
(HLD)
A/B
(MAX)
A/B
(MIN)
A/B
(AVG)
Shows the currently selected trace mode for the
respective trace. The background color of the text
coincides with the color of the graph. For more information on trace modes, see section “Selecting the
trace mode” on page 62.
Trace finder
If more than 90 percent of a results trace is not shown onscreen
because it is above or below screen boundaries, a trace finder icon
consisting of an up or down arrow and the word “Trace“ shows where
the trace can be found. The trace finder icon is positioned in the middle
of the results display. By modifying the reference level accordingly you
can bring the trace back into view.
Marker field
If any of the markers is active, the marker field is displayed, showing the
measurement values at the marker positions. Up to four markers are
displayed with their level and frequency values. If you use four markers
and activate a fifth (up to six markers are available) one marker value
will be hidden and the new one will be displayed instead. By pressing
the relevant marker softkey you can display the hidden marker value
again. A marker can be switched from absolute to relative values. The
values are then shown relative to those of marker 1 (e.g. A1).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
17
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Input field
The input field allows you to enter a number or a text, depending on
the selected function. The meaning of the input value is expressed by
the header line. Some input fields have an additional explanation of the
step size beneath. The step size applies when the value is changed
using the up/down cursor keys instead of the numeric keys.
Softkey descriptions
The softkey descriptions indicate the assignment of a function to a
softkey. They are aligned to the lower side with the horizontal softkeys
and to the right-hand side with the vertical softkeys. See “Softkeys” on
page 21 for more information.
Keypad
The front panel carries a large number of keys, giving you direct access
to functions and menus and allowing you to enter test parameters such
as the center frequency. The keypad is divided into the following
sections:
Function keys
The function keys have specific functions which do not change. Therefore they are sometimes also referred to as “hardkeys“ in contrast to
the softkeys, whose functions change with the description given on the
screen.
The function keys are:
18
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Table 7
Function keys
Key
Function
Mode
Measurement mode selection. This function key
allows you to select between different predefined
types of measurements for specific applications.
It also provides access to system settings.
Preset
Presets all the entry fields of the selected mode
to the factory default settings. It does not affect
the settings of other modes.
To prevent accidental resets, the preset function
does not execute after a short keypress. Press
this function key for at least half a second to
return to the defaults.
Hold/Run
Stops and starts sweeps.
Param
This function key calls up the parameter pages
summarizing the current settings. Press Exit to
close the parameter window.
Note that the parameter windows differ between
the measurement modes.
Parameters that lead to an UNCAL warning are
marked with a diamond.
Rcl/Store
Provides access to the Memory menus.
Clr Trc
This function key resets previous results (including averages), the sweep counter and the failure
counter, and starts a new sweep.
Cent
Direct access to the center frequency input field
within the Frequency menu.
Span
Direct access to the frequency span input field
within the Frequency menu.
Ref
Direct access to the reference level input field.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
19
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Table 7
Function keys
Key
Function
Mkr
Access to the Marker menu.
Cursor keys
In an input field, the up and down cursor keys are used to increase or
decrease the current value. The left and right cursor keys move the
cursor position by one digit.
If a marker field is active, the up and down cursors move the marker by
half a division up or down, respectively. The left and right cursor keys
move the marker pixelwise.
Immediate reaction
Any change of an input parameter with the cursor keys has immediate effect. With the straight feedback on the screen, you can easily
adjust parameters to the optimum values with a trial-and-error
approach.
Numeric keys
The numeric keys allow you to enter a value in a way similar to a pocket
calculator. On some input fields, you can enter text instead, as on a
mobile phone.
Invalid entries
If you enter an invalid number or string, the 9101 beeps and corrects
the entry to the closest valid value.
The ± key offers an additional feature. After connecting a PCL printer
to the 9101 you can print screens directly by pressing this key. For
details on configuring printers and printing refer to “Configuring a
printer” on page 43 and “Printing” on page 33.
20
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Enter keys
Any input of numerical or alphanumerical entries must be closed or
can be affected by one of the enter keys. The meaning of the individual
enter keys is as follows:
Table 8
Escape key
Backspace key
Enter keys
Key
Function
GHz/dBm
In frequency input fields, closes the entry by
applying the unit GHz (gigahertz). In power input
fields, assigns the unit dBm to the entered value.
MHz/dB/μs
In frequency input fields, closes the entry by
applying the unit MHz (megahertz). In power
input fields, assigns the unit dB to the entered
value. In time parameter input fields, assigns the
unit μs to the value.
kHz/dBμV/ms
In frequency input fields, closes the entry by
applying the unit kHz (kilohertz). In power input
fields, assigns the unit dBμV to the entered value.
In time parameter input fields, assigns the unit ms
to the value.
Enter
Confirms an entry without a unit and with the
units hertz and seconds.
If pressed while an input field is open, the ESCAPE key
closes this input field without changing the previous
value.
Deletes the last entered alphanumerical (backspace).
When an input field is entered, all digits are marked. By
pressing the backspace key, the entire entry is deleted.
Softkeys
The functions of the softkeys change with the description on the screen
given next to the respective key.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
21
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Horizontal (menu) softkeys
The horizontal softkeys provide access to the various menus. The name
of the active menu is highlighted; the functions of a menu are offered
on the vertical softkeys. Submenus are indicated with three dots (“...”);
the menu softkey without the dots leads you one level up in the menu
hierarchy.
Vertical (function) softkeys
The vertical softkeys allow you to change the settings of the 9101.
The vertical softkeys in the 9101 carry out one of the following functions:
– Normal settings – by pushing the softkey, an entry field appears on
the top of the display, allowing you to enter numerical or alphanumerical data. The data become valid after pushing one of the enter
keys. Some of the softkeys for normal settings also describe the
currently set value.
Example: The Channel softkey in channel power mode.
– Combined entry and selection – this type of softkey allows you to
change a value and also to change a related setting, for example
changing between automatic and manual parameter setting. The
first push on the softkey opens the entry field like the normal
settings softkey. Pushing it several times results in the 9101
toggling between the available options. The option currently
selected is indicated in blue while the inactive options are shown in
white.
Example: The RBW softkey.
22
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
– Execution – by pushing the softkey, the function described is
performed. An execution softkey is indicated by an exclamation
mark.
Example: Max Peak softkey in the Marker menu.
– Selection – several selection softkeys allow you to choose between
different options. The selection softkeys for one function are indicated by a vertical bar connecting the softkeys, and a text
describing the function. The option currently active is highlighted,
i.e. indicated by inverted colors.
Example: The TrigMode softkeys in the Sweep menu.
Entering numbers and
text
Whenever an input field is open, it expects you to enter either numbers
or characters (where characters may also include numerical digits).
You will notice immediately what the 9101 expects as the numeric keys
have the appropriate function.
Filling in a numerical input
field
When the 9101 software expects a numerical entry, pressing a numeric
key results in the appropriate digit to appear in the input field. The 9101
may or may not allow you to enter a decimal number or a signed value,
so the keys for the decimal point and for changing the sign of the
number are either active or not.
When all digits, the sign and the decimal point have been entered as
required, one of the enter keys must be pressed. Numbers often carry
a unit with them; the enter keys provide the appropriate units.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
23
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using the front panel
Acoustical reaction on inputs
After entering a new parameter value, one of two acoustical alarms
may appear:
– Short beep (hint): The parameter is out of limits, or the input affects
an associated parameter; the respective parameter has been
corrected by the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
Example 1: An invalid stop frequency of 8 GHz has been entered,
resulting in a short beep and the maximum stop frequency being
set.
Example 2: The start frequency is set to 2 GHz, the stop frequency
is set to 4 GHz and the user enters a new span of 3 GHz. This
results in the start frequency being changed to 1 GHz and a short
beep to sound because the new span would result in a stop
frequency beyond the maximum of 4 GHz.
– Long beep (error): A parameter is set to an invalid value and the
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer resumes the old value,
sounding an error beep.
Example: After entering a new (invalid) attenuation value of 60 dB,
the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer sounds a long beep and
sets the attenuation back to the previous value.
Filling in a text input field
Some input fields can be filled with alphanumerical text instead. The
numeric keys can then be used to enter characters. The keys may have
several letters or numbers assigned. The assignment of the keys in this
case is as follows:
Table 9
Keys for alphanumerical text entry
Key
Assignment
0
0
1
1
2
A, B, C, 2
3
D, E, F, 3
4
G, H, I, 4
5
J, K, L, 5
6
M, N, O, 6
7
P, Q, R, S, 7
8
T, U, V, 8
9
W, X, Y, Z, 9
.
not assigned
±
not assigned
To enter a character, push the key rapidly and repeatedly until the
desired character appears in the input field.
24
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Selecting the measurement mode
Changing the input
Once an input field is open, you can move the cursor with the LEFT/
RIGHT cursor keys to place it within the number or text. Additional digits
or characters can be entered, or you can delete the digit or character
in front of the cursor using the BACKSPACE key.
Selecting the measurement mode
The 9101 provides different measurement modes:
– The spectrum analysis mode is most versatile. It provides most of
the options included in all other modes. For more information on
this mode, refer to page 49.
– The channel power mode allows you to measure the radiated
power within a certain frequency band. Read more about the
channel power mode on page 75.
In addition, the Mode menu provides access to the system settings, e.g.
the I/O configuration, and to version information. See section
“Checking general settings” on page 34 for more details.
Figure 5
Selecting a measurement mode
To select the measurement mode, proceed as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
The Mode menu appears (see Figure 5).
2 Select a new mode or return to the mode last active by pressing
the respective softkey.
The main menu of the selected mode appears. If you select a new
mode, all parameters are set to the values which were used when
the mode was last active. If, however, you resume the last active
mode, measurements are continued.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
25
Chapter 2 General Operation
Working with the markers
Working with the markers
Figure 6
Example of markers
The 9101 includes powerful and easy-to-use marker functions. Up to
six markers can be used; up to five of them can be delta markers.
Markers are easy to place and you can easily affect the center
frequency and the reference level upon a keypress. If you use two
traces you can also use markers on trace A and trace B. The markers
are named accordingly (e.g. A1, B1). Delta markers are identified by D
(e.g. DA1).
It is important to note that if you place the cursor on a signal peak and
then reduce the span, the marker position may be offset a little from
the peak. This is due to the limited resolution of the displayed frequencies when using a high span. After reducing the span, the marker
should be readjusted to the new peak.
Enabling and moving a
marker
1 From the main menu, select Marker. Or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
If you select Marker from the main menu when no marker is active,
the softkey for marker 1 is highlighted.
To enable marker 1, toggle the softkey until “ON“ is highlighted.
The input field for marker 1 appears.
If you use the MKR function key when no marker is active, marker 1
(A1 or B1) will be enabled at the maximum peak. The input field for
marker 1 appears.
2 If you want to enable another marker, push the appropriate softkey
(A1 through A4 or B1 trough B4). If you want to use more than four
markers, press the Mkr More softkey to display the marker softkeys
for marker 5 and marker 6 and proceed as described for markers 1
26
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Working with the markers
to 4.
The marker is enabled and the input field opens; the selected
marker appears in the marker field in the top bar of the display.
3 If required, move the marker to another position using the cursor
keys, one of the softkeys Max Peak and Next Peak, or by entering
the frequency with the numeric keys and the appropriate enter key.
Disabling a marker
1 From the main menu, select Marker. Or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
The Marker menu appears and the input field for marker 1 appears.
2 Push the softkey (one of A1 through A6 or B1 through B6) for the
marker which you want to disable. If you use more than four
markers you can display the softkeys for marker 5 and 6 by
pressing the Mkr More softkey.
Toggle the softkey until “OFF“ is highlighted. The marker is disabled
and the respective marker values disappear in the marker field at
the top. By toggling to “ON“ again the marker will be enabled again.
Enabling a delta marker
For delta markers, the power level and frequency relative to marker 1
is displayed in the marker field. Marker 1 cannot be a delta marker. If
marker 1 is not yet enabled when you enable another marker as a delta
marker, marker 1 will be enabled automatically.
1 From the main menu, select Marker, or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
2 Select the softkey for the marker which you want to turn into a delta
marker (A2 through A6 or B2 through B6). If you use more than four
markers you can display the softkeys for marker 5 and 6 by
pressing the Mkr More softkey.
If not already enabled, the marker is turned on.
3 Push the softkey until “REL“ is highlighted. The respective marker in
the marker field is indicated as a delta marker, e.g. DA2 instead of
A2.
Disabling a delta marker
1 From the main menu, select Marker, or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
The Marker menu and the marker 1 input field appear.
2 Select the softkey for the delta marker that you want to disable (e.g.
DA2). If you use more than four markers you can display the softkeys for marker 5 and 6 by pressing the Mkr More softkey.
3 To disable the marker completely, push the softkey until “OFF“ is
highlighted.
To turn the delta marker into a normal marker displaying absolute
values again toggle the softkey to “ON“.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
27
Chapter 2 General Operation
Working with the markers
NOTE
The described procedures for enabling and disabling delta markers
apply to serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Setting a marker on a
frequency relative to
marker 1
1 Enable a delta marker as described in “Enabling a delta marker”.
For the selected delta marker, the input field shows the frequency
relative to marker 1.
2 Enter a (signed) frequency relative to the frequency at marker 1,
either using the numeric keys and the respective enter key, or
moving the cursor to that frequency with the help of the cursor
keys.
The marker field indicates the desired frequency offset for that
marker, along with the power level relative to the power at marker
1.
Changing the center
frequency with a marker
This function modifies the center frequency, adapting the frequency of
a selectable marker.
1 From the main menu, select Marker, or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
The Marker menu and the input field for marker 1 appear.
2 If you want to use the frequency at a marker position other than
marker 1, push the appropriate softkey (A2 through A6 or B2
through B6). If you use more than four markers you can display the
softkeys for marker 5 and 6 by pressing the Mkr More softkey.
3 Push the Marker to Center softkey.
The center frequency changes to the frequency at which the
selected marker is located. The frequency span only changes if the
change in center frequency would lead to an invalid start or stop
frequency.
Changing the reference
level with the marker
The reference level can be changed to the level at a marker position as
follows:
1 From the main menu, select Marker, or push the MKR function key
in any menu.
2 Select the Mkr Transfer menu.
3 If you want to use the power level at a marker position other than
marker 1, push the appropriate softkey (A2 through A6 or B2
through B6). If you use more than four markers you can display the
softkeys for marker 5 and 6 by pressing the Mkr More softkey.
4 Push the Marker to Ref. Lvl softkey.
The reference level changes to the level of the selected marker.
28
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using limit lines
Assigning the marker
frequency to FStep
For measurements of harmonics or intermodulation products, it can be
useful to easily change between frequencies in user-defined steps. The
“Marker to FStep” function assigns the active marker (or delta marker)
frequency to FStep, the step width for the selection of center frequency
and marker frequency.
Assumption: One of the markers A1 through A6 or B1 to B6 is active.
1 From the main menu, select Marker > Mkr Transfer to access the
Marker Transfer menu.
2 Push Marker to FStep.
The FStep parameter assumes manual mode. If the currently active
marker is an absolute marker, the frequency at the marker position
becomes the new FStep value.
Alternatively, if the currently active marker is a relative (delta)
marker, the difference between the frequencies at the active
marker and marker 1 becomes the new FStep value.
If the new FStep value is higher than 1 GHz, the old FStep value is
maintained and the 9101 sounds a hint beep.
Using limit lines
Figure 7
Overview
Example of limit lines in spectrum analysis
A very useful feature of the 9101 is the possibility to set limits for the
trace A results. These are displayed on the screen and the 9101 can
show if the results exceed the limits.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
29
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using limit lines
Two different limit modes exist in the 9101. In the first case, the limits
exist of horizontal lines for the upper and lower limit. This method is
called “simple limits”; the limits can be entered directly in the Limits
menus of the 9101.
In the second case, there are more complex limits as shown in the
example in Figure 7. These limits can be entered with a comfortable
tool on a PC and loaded to the 9101 via RS-232 or LAN interface. A set
of limit lines can be used to define a measurement template. There are
versatile tools around these limits available on the 9101, such as a fail
counter, a beep when a failure occurs, or a measurement hold function
upon failure. The limits can be used both in the frequency and in the
time domain.
Up to 99 sets of limits can be stored on the 9101.
The actual limit values must be defined on a PC and loaded to the 9101
using the 9100 Data Exchange Software. Several limit files can be
stored on the 9101. The name of the current limit file is indicated in the
upper left-hand corner.
Note that the limits are defined within a grid, no matter what the units
on the vertical and horizontal axes are. This way, you can apply the
limits to different frequency ranges and power levels. It is your responsibility, however, to select a useful frequency range, reference level and
level scale.
Note that a FAIL indication may occur if the start frequency is 0 Hz and
an upper limit is set at this frequency.
Using simple limits
Switching simple limits on
and off
Simple limits consist of constant upper and lower limits. They must be
activated to take effect. Once activated, each measurement is accompanied by a Pass/Fail verdict indicating whether or not the measurement result was within the limits.
By switching limit lines on, any previously active limit template is
disabled.
1 Press Level > Limits Memory.
2 Press the Simple Limits softkey so that the new choice (on or off) is
highlighted.
When switching limits on, red horizontal lines indicating the upper
and lower limits appear. A Pass/Fail verdict is displayed with every
new measurement in the upper left corner of the screen. The text
above the verdict (“Simple Limits”) indicates that the verdict applies
to simple limits.
When switching limits off, the limit lines and the verdict disappear.
30
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using limit lines
Defining upper and lower
limits
The limits can be changed only when simple limits are activated. The
range of valid entries depends on the power scale displayed (vertical
axis) as follows:
Table 10 Valid entries for upper/lower simple limits (relative to
reference level)
Scale
Valid range
1 dB/division
–8 … 0 dB
3 dB/division
–24 … 0 dB
5 dB/division
–40 … 0 dB
10 dB/division
–80 … 0 dB
15 dB/division
–120 … 0 dB
20 dB/division
–160 … 0 dB
Follow the steps below to define simple upper and lower limits.
1 Press Level > Limits Memory.
2 Press the Upper softkey, enter a new value for the upper limit (in dB,
relative to the reference level) (or move the upper limit with the UP/
DOWN cursor keys) and confirm with MHZ/DB/ΜS or ENTER.
The upper limit line is moved to the new value.
3 Press the LOWER softkey, enter a new value for the lower limit (in
dB) (or move the lower limit with the UP/DOWN cursor keys) and
confirm with MHZ/DB/ΜS or ENTER.
The lower limit line is moved to the new value.
Using limit templates
Selecting limit lines within
the 9101
Limits can be comfortably defined with a PC-based tool and loaded to
the 9101. This is described in full detail in chapter “9100 Data
Exchange Software” on page 167. The sections below describe how to
recall, delete, activate and deactivate limit templates.
1 From the main menu, select Level > Limits Memory.
The Limits Memory menu appears.
2 Push the Recall Limit Template softkey.
An entry field appears, together with a file selection box.
3 Select a file either by moving the selection to its file name using the
UP/DOWN cursor keys, or by entering the file name in the entry field
and closing the input field by pressing ENTER.
The file with the limits is loaded and the upper/lower limits are activated immediately.
Activating and deactivating
limit templates
1 Select a limits file (see section “Selecting limit lines within
the 9101”).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Using limit lines
2 Select Level > Limits Evaluation
The Limits Evaluation menu appears.
3 Select the limits option you want by pushing the appropriate
softkey from the following choice: Off, Upper/Lower, Upper Limit,
Lower Limit.
If you selected Off, no limits are displayed. Otherwise, the selected
limits curve (upper and/or lower limits) appears on the screen. A
Pass/Fail indication is given for each measurement trace in the
upper left-hand corner.
Deleting limit files in
the 9101
1 From the main menu, select Level > Limits Memory.
2 a. To delete an individual file, push Delete Limit Template, select a
limits file with the UP/DOWN cursor keys and push ENTER to delete
an individual file (pressing ESC aborts the process before the file is
deleted).
b. To delete all limit files stored in the 9101, push Delete All
Templates. Confirm by pressing ENTER, if you really want to delete
all limit files.
Counting limit failures
When limit checking is enabled, a failure counter can be activated. The
number of failures appears below the Pass/Fail verdict. The counter
makes particular sense for statistical evaluations. For this application, it
is important to define the number of measurements. The following
sequence can be useful to obtain a failure count in conjunction with a
defined number of measurement traces.
1 Select a limited number of traces (Freq > Sweep, see “Performing a
limited number of measurements” on page 60).
2 From the main menu, select Level > Limits Evaluation > Fail Count
to turn the failure counter on; if it was on already it should be
switched off and on again.
The failure counter is reset to 0.
3 Push the HOLD/RUN softkey to start the measurement.
Both the measurement counter and the failure counter start from 0.
When the selected number of traces has been reached, the
measurements are stopped and you can read the failure count.
32
Resetting the counter
The failure counter for the limits check can be reset by turning it off and
then on again (in the Level > Limits Evaluation menu).
Enabling a beep upon
failures
1 From the main menu, select Level > Limits Evaluation.
The Limits Evaluation menu appears.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Printing
2 Push the Fail Beep softkey to activate or deactivate the beep
counter:
If activated, a beep sounds each time the measured signal exceeds
the limits.
Viewing a failed
measurement
This feature can be useful if you want to stop the measurement and
view the measured signal when it fails the limits. Note that the 9101
should be set to continuous measurements.
1 From the main menu, select Level > Limits Evaluation.
2 Push the Fail Hold softkey once or twice to enable or disable the
hold-on-fail function.
The measurements are halted when a failure occurs. The trace of
the failed signal remains on screen.
Measurements can also be stored and recalled in the 9101 for later
analysis or comparison. This is shown in “Storing and loading traces”
on page 67.
With the 9100 Data Exchange Software, traces can also be transferred
to and viewed and stored on a PC. For more details, please refer to
chapter “9100 Data Exchange Software” on page 167.
Printing
The 9101 offers the possibility of printing measurement results, for
example traces, directly from the instrument. In order to print results
screens on a connected printer simply press the ± key on the numeric
keypad of the 9101’s front panel.
NOTE
If an input field is active while you press the ± key, it has the ± functionality assigned to it. In this case printing is not possible. In order to
be able to print deactivate the input field first by deselecting the
respective softkey.
For details on supported printers and configuring a printer refer to
“Configuring a printer” on page 43.
Controlling the 9101 from a PC
The 9101 can be used under remote control from a PC. The interfaces
supported for this are the serial interface (RS-232) and the LAN (TCP/
IP). Please refer to section “SCPI Command Reference” on page 105
for more information on remote control.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
33
Chapter 2 General Operation
Returning from remote control to local mode
Returning from remote control to local mode
To gain manual control after using the 9101 under remote control,
press ESCAPE.
Checking general settings
This section covers information about the unit, setting display brightness, time and date, and configuring the remote control interfaces of
the 9101.
Reading the serial
number
You can find the serial number of your 9101 as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System.
The System Information display appears (see Figure 8), showing
the serial number, the installed software version and the installed
option.
Figure 8
Reading the software
version number
System Information menu
Before loading a new software version or reporting problems, you may
want to check the currently installed version.
1 Press the MODE function key followed by the System softkey.
The System Information menu appears.
2 Read and note the software version number in the field entitled
Application.
34
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Reviewing the calibration
As for all test instruments, the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer’s
accuracy should be checked against its specifications. This process is
called calibration. If the 9101 accuracy falls outside the specified tolerance, it may be necessary to correct the instrument.
Aeroflex recommends a calibration interval of one year. The 9101
stores the date of the last calibration by a Aeroflex-certified lab and the
date when the next calibration is due. In addition, you can document
when the calibration date has been reviewed last.
To check if the 9101 is due for calibration, proceed as follows:
Press the MODE function key followed by the Calibration Information
softkey.
The Calibration Information menu appears.
Figure 9
Calibration Information menu
1 Here the calibration details for the instrument are displayed.
The Calibration Number area shows the calibration number.
The first line of the Calibration area indicates the date of the last
calibration and the organization calibrating the 9101.
The second line indicates when and by whom the calibration has
been checked last.
The third line indicates when the next calibration is due. This date is
typically one year after the last calibration.
2 Push the Date Last Check softkey to change the last check date. It
will be set to the actual date as set by the built-in real-time clock.
3 Push the Name Last Check softkey to enter the name of the person
that carried out the last calibration date review.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
35
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
NOTE
The described procedure for reviewing the calibration applies to
serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Checking installed
options
Aeroflex provides different application programs and options for the
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. These may or may not be active on
your instrument. To check which options are actually installed on your
9101, take the following steps:
1 Press the MODE function key followed by the System softkey.
The System Information menu appears.
2 Select Options.
The Options menu appears, indicating the installed options in bold
print with a tick in front; the options not installed are shown in grey.
Installing a new option
Software options can be installed by entering an activation key which
you can purchase from Aeroflex or one of its representatives. To install
a new option:
1 Press the MODE function key followed by the System softkey.
The System Information menu appears.
2 Select Options and press Activate Options.
3 Enter the activation key and press ENTER.
If the code is valid, the appropriate option is shown in bold print
with a tick in front, indicating that the option is accessible now.
Changing the display
brightness
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > Settings.
The general settings display appears (see Figure 10), showing the
current display backlight setting as a percentage.
3 Press the Display Extern softkey to change the backlight setting for
usage while the 9101 is connected to an external power supply
Press the Display Battery softkey to change the backlight setting for
running the 9101 on battery. Here, you can specify a reduced
backlight setting for battery usage in order to save energy.
In both cases the backlight input field is highlighted.
36
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
4 Enter a new value in the field for the backlight setting you intend to
change and confirm with ENTER, or change the current value with
the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
The 9101 display uses the new brightness values.
Figure 10 General Settings menu
NOTE
The display setting for adjusting the brightness is not affected by a
press on the PRESET function key but by a push on the Back to
Defaults softkey.
Enabling and disabling
beeps
Warning and error beeps can be turned off and on in the General
Settings menu:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > Settings.
The general settings display appears, showing the current setting
for beeps (on or off).
3 Press the Beep softkey several times until the desired setting is
highlighted (on or off).
The beep input field shows the current setting.
NOTE
This parameter is not affected by a press on the PRESET function key
but by a push on the Back to Defaults softkey.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
37
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Assigning a device name
to the instrument
A device name for the 9101 can be useful if you have several units of
the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. They can be identified if you
choose different names for them. The name also appears on traces
transferred to the PC with the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
You can enter a new name as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > General Settings.
The general settings display appears, showing the current device
name.
3 Press the Device Name softkey.
The device name input field is active so you can overwrite the
current name.
4 Enter a new name (max. 11 characters; see section “Filling in a text
input field” on page 24 to learn how to do this) and close the entry
field by pressing ENTER.
The new name is displayed in the device name field.
NOTE
This parameter is not affected by a press on the PRESET function key
but by a push on the Back to Defaults softkey.
Adjusting date and time
in the instrument
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer includes a real-time clock. It
can be used to show the actual date and time or to compare it with the
date when the next calibration is due.
In order to change the date and time, proceed as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > Settings > Time/Date.
The time/date display appears showing the current date and time.
38
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Figure 11 Time/Date menu
3 Press the Time softkey.
The time input field is active so you can move the cursor with the
LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys behind a digit that needs to be changed,
push the BACKSPACE key to erase it and enter a new digit.
4 Press the Date softkey.
The date input field is active so you can overwrite the old date with
a new one or move the cursor with the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys
behind a digit that needs to be changed, push the BACKSPACE key
to erase it and enter a new digit.
5 Press ENTER or another function key to confirm the entry.
The new date and time are shown on the Time/Date menu.
NOTE
These parameters are affected neither by a press on the PRESET
function key nor by a push on the Back to Defaults softkey.
Changing the baud rate
on the RS-232 port
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > I/O Config > RS 232 Config.
The RS 232 Config menu is displayed (see Figure 12), showing the
current RS-232 bit rate (or baud rate) and interface settings.
3 To change the data rate, push the Baudrate softkey and select a
new rate with the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
The change takes effect immediately.
NOTE
This parameter is not affected by a press on the PRESET function key
but by a push on the Back to Defaults softkey.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
39
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Figure 12 RS 232 Configuration
NOTE
The described procedure for changing the baud rate applies to
serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Changing the IP address
of the 9101
The IP address should be adapted to the address space in use in your
environment and should be unique for each device on that network.
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > I/O Config
The TCP/IP Config menu is displayed, showing the current TCP/IP
settings.
40
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Figure 13 TCP/IP Configuration
3 Select System > I/O Config.
The port configuration display appears, showing the current TCP/IP
settings.
4 To change the IP address of the 9101, press the Target IP softkey.
The address field is highlighted.
5 Overwrite the entire IP address or select a field with the LEFT/
RIGHT cursor keys, enter a new IP address and press ENTER.
6 To change the subnet mask press the Subnet Mask softkey. The
Subnet Mask field is highlighted.
7 Overwrite the entire subnet mask or select a field with the LEFT/
RIGHT cursor keys, enter a new one and press ENTER.
8 To change the gateway press the Gateway softkey. The Gateway
field is highlighted.
9 Overwrite the entire gateway or select a field with the LEFT/RIGHT
cursor keys, enter a new one and press ENTER.
10 For the change to take effect, switch the 9101 off and then on
again.
11 Ensure that your application on the PC addresses the 9101 using
this IP address so that the two units can communicate with each
other.
NOTE
The described procedure for changing the IP address of the 9101
applies to serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
41
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Changing the IP address
of the PC
For remote control of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer from a
PC, the IP address of that PC can be entered on the instrument.
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > I/O Config
The TCP/IP Config menu is displayed (see Figure 13), showing the
current TCP/IP settings.
3 Select System > I/O Config.
The port configuration display appears, showing the current TCP/IP
settings.
4 To change the IP address of the 9101, press the Host IP softkey.
The address field is highlighted.
5 Overwrite the entire IP address or select a field with the LEFT/
RIGHT cursor keys, enter a new IP address and press ENTER.
6 Reboot the 9101 (that means, switch it off and on again) for the
new settings to work.
NOTE
The described procedure for changing the PC’s IP address applies to
serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Changing the IP port
used by the 9101
When the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer is to be controlled
remotely from a PC, the PC must address the remote control application within the 9101 with an IP port number. The 9101 uses a default of
49200 which can be changed easily as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > I/O Config
The TCP/IP Config menu is displayed, showing the current TCP/IP
settings.
3 To change the IP port of the 9101, push the Port softkey.
The address field is highlighted.
4 Overwrite the entire IP address or select a field with the LEFT/
RIGHT cursor keys, enter a new IP address and press ENTER.
5 Reboot the 9101 (that means, switch it off and on again) for the
new settings to work.
The Back to Default softkey resets the parameter to its default value.
42
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Configuring a printer
You can connect a printer for direct printing via the ± key on the 9101’s
front panel.
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > I/O Config > Printer Config
The printer settings are displayed.
Figure 14 Printer Configuration menu
3 In order to configure a connected PCL 5 printer for direct printing
press the softkey Printer Type and toggle it to PCL by pressing it
until this option is highlighted.
4 In order to specify the baud rate of the printer press the Printer
Baudrate softkey. The Printer Rate input field is highlighted. The
default is 19200.
NOTE
Direct printing works with PCL 5 printers with integrated drivers.
Pure GDI printers are not supported.
Selecting user interface
colors
NOTE
The described procedure for changing the IP port used by the 9101
applies to serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
You can change the colors of some of the user interface elements in
the Color Scheme menu. The available colors are shown in the color
palette at the top of the display and in Table 11.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
43
Chapter 2 General Operation
Checking general settings
Table 11 Color palette in the 9101 user interface
Color number
Color
1
black
2
grey
3
blue
4
green
5
violet
6
yellow
7
red
8
brown
The colors of the traces, the grid and the limit lines can be modified as
follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select System > Color Scheme.
The color scheme display appears (see Figure 15), showing the
current color settings.
Figure 15 Color scheme menu
3 To change the color of a user interface element, push the appropriate softkey (Trace A, Trace B, Grid, Limits or Trace Offset Color).
The input field on the left is activated.
44
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Working with stored settings
4 To select a new color, enter a number corresponding to the colors
in the color palette and press ENTER, or use the UP/DOWN cursor
keys to change the color.
The color field to the left of the input field changes according to the
selection made.
5 Press the Last Mode softkey to return to the measurement screen.
The new color scheme takes effect immediately.
Working with stored settings
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer provides the capability of
storing all the parameters for a particular measurement, allowing to
recall these parameters whenever the measurement shall be repeated
under the same conditions, and this includes the measurement mode.
A large number of parameter sets can be stored under different names
that allow fast and easy identification; each parameter set name may
consist of up to 11 characters.
In addition to using these files of parameter sets on the same 9101, you
can also transfer them to a PC for backup, easy modification and
amendment using a standard text editor, or for using the same parameters on multiple 9101 instruments. This is described in more detail in
sections “Working with settings” on page 190 and “Managing files on
the PC and on the 9101” on page 191.
Storing instrument
settings
You can store the instrument settings as a whole under a name with up
to 11 characters. The procedure to enter text in alphanumerical input
fields is explained in section “Entering numbers and text” on page 23.
1 From the main menu, select RCL/STORE > Settings > Store Setting.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter a name for the instrument settings. Below the input field, a list of existing settings fies is
indicated.
2 Enter a name for the settings. To use and modify an existing name,
you can move the cursor to a suitable settings name with the UP/
DOWN cursor keys. The selected trace name also appears in the
input field; use the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys to move the cursor to
the appropriate position within the settings name to enter additional characters or delete existing ones.
3 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the instrument settings are stored under
the selected name.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
45
Chapter 2 General Operation
Working with stored settings
Reusing an instrument
settings name
Reloading instrument
settings
You cannot overwrite an existing settings file using the same settings
name. If you want to reuse a settings name, you will have to delete the
old one first.
1 From the main menu, select RCL/STORE > Settings > Recall
Setting.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter the settings name.
Below the input field, a list of existing settings is indicated.
2 Enter the name of the settings file to load, or choose one with the
UP/DOWN cursor keys.
3 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the selected settings are loaded. The
previously active settings are not stored automatically but
discarded.
Deleting a settings file
Stored settings files can be deleted. Note that there will be no warning;
once you have selected and requested a file to be deleted, this will
occur immediately.
1 From the main menu, select RCL/STORE > Settings > Delete
Setting.
An input field for the name of the settings file to be deleted
appears, together with a file selection box.
2 Select the settings file to be deleted using the UP/DOWN cursor
keys. Alternatively, enter the settings name with the numeric keys.
3 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The settings file is deleted from the list.
46
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 2 General Operation
Restoring factory settings for all modes
4 Select another instrument settings file for deletion, or press
ESCAPE to leave the entry field and the file selection box.
Deleting all intrument
settings files
Instead of deleting settings files individually, all files can be deleted in
one step. You will be asked to confirm this step.
1 From the main menu, select RCL/STORE > Settings > Delete All
Settings.
A query appears, asking you to confirm your selection.
2 Press ENTER to have all settings files deleted.
The query disappears. All settings files are deleted.
Restoring factory settings for all modes
In addition to the PRESET function key (see “Using the front panel” on
page 13), which resets the mode currently selected to its factory
default settings, the 9101’s Mode menu offers the Factory Settings
function. This function resets all modes to their factory default settings
and returns you to the spectrum analysis mode. In order to restore the
factory settings for all modes proceed as follows:
1 Press the MODE function key.
The Mode menu is displayed.
2 Press the Factory Settings softkey. The Factory Settings menu
appears.
3 Press the Preset All softkey. A message will be displayed asking you
to confirm that all modes should be reset.
4 Press ENTER to confirm the process. All modes will now be reset to
their factory settings.
NOTE
This function is available for serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Improving the frequency accuracy
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer has an internal time base that
is used to generate the internal frequencies for the receiver. The accuracy of the internal time base is specified in the data sheet for the 9101.
If necessary, the frequency accuracy can be further improved by using
an external, high-precision time base. The time base should consist of
a stable frequency of either 5, 10 or 13 MHz. This reference clock
signal should have a power level of at least 0 dBm and should be fed
to the EXT. REF. IN/ EXT. TRIG. BNC connector (see “EXT. REF. IN/ EXT.
TRIG. connector” on page 11).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
47
Chapter 2 General Operation
Improving the frequency accuracy
48
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3
Spectrum Analysis Operation
3
This chapter describes the instrument’s functions that are specific to
the spectrum analysis mode. Topics discussed in this chapter are as
follows:
– “Selecting the measurement mode” on page 50
– “Changing the frequency settings” on page 50
– “Selecting RBW, VBW and SWT” on page 53
– “Setting up the level parameters” on page 54
– “Changing the input impedance” on page 56
– “Applying special functions on the signal” on page 58
– “Setting up the trace” on page 61
– “Storing and loading traces” on page 67
– “Special measurement functions” on page 69
– “Viewing the spectrum analysis mode parameters” on page 73
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
49
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Selecting the measurement mode
Selecting the measurement mode
The 9101 provides different measurement modes. To select spectrum
analysis mode, proceed as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
The Mode menu appears.
2 Select Spectrum Analysis.
The Spectrum Analysis main menu appears.
Changing the frequency settings
Figure 16 Frequency menu
There are different methods to set the frequency range to be
measured; the range can be expressed by either the start and stop
frequencies (i.e. first and last frequencies on the display), or by center
frequency and span (i.e. the center and the frequency range), or by
other combinations of center frequency, span, start and stop frequencies.
All four parameters are accessible in the Freq menu. On the main
menu, however, only one of the combinations mentioned above is
shown, depending on the parameter last entered.
NOTE
Changing a frequency parameter may affect an associated parameter.
Example: If you change the span to the maximum of 4 GHz, the start
and stop frequencies are changed to 0 and 4 GHz, respectively.
50
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Changing the frequency settings
Setting start and stop
frequency
1 Push the CENT function key (or the Freq softkey in the main menu).
The vertical softkeys include Start and Stop softkeys.
2 Push the Start softkey.
An entry field appears, indicating the start frequency currently set
and the step size for the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
3 Enter a new frequency using the numeric keys, the cursor keys and
the BACKSPACE key.
4 Conclude the entry by pushing an enter key for the unit (GHZ or
MHZ).
If the start frequency entered is lower than the stop frequency, the
horizontal axis will display the range from the new start to the stop
frequency.
If the new start frequency is higher than or equal to the stop
frequency, the start frequency is used as the center frequency with
zero span, i.e. the signal at the selected frequency will be shown in
the time domain.
5 Push the Stop softkey and enter the frequency for the right end of
the display.
You can also place softkeys for the start and stop frequencies available
on the main menu by changing the frequency mode, see page 52.
Setting center frequency
and span
1 Push the CENT function key (or the Freq softkey in the main menu).
The vertical softkeys include Center and Span. An entry field
appears, indicating the center frequency currently set and the step
size for the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
2 Enter a new frequency using the numeric keys, the cursor keys and
the BACKSPACE key.
3 Conclude the entry by pushing an enter key for the unit (GHZ or
MHZ).
4 Push the Span softkey and enter the frequency for the range from
the left to the right end of the display.
You can also place softkeys for the center frequency and the span
available on the main menu by changing the frequency mode, see
section “Changing the main menu for different frequency parameters”
below.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
51
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Changing the frequency settings
Changing the main
menu for different
frequency parameters
The main menu shows two softkeys for the definition of the frequency
range on the display. Different methods exist to define the range as
depicted above; you can configure these softkeys to one of the two
allowable combinations as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Freq > Freq Mode.
2 Select the combination of softkeys that you want to see in the main
menu (Start/Stop or Center/Span).
3 Return to the main menu by pushing the Main ... softkey.
The main menu appears and displays the selected combination of
keys.
Note that the description of the horizontal frequency axis changes with
the selected parameter set.
Viewing the complete
frequency band
To change the frequency range to the full bandwidth supported by the
9101, proceed as follows:
1 From the main menu, push the Freq softkey.
The Frequency menu is displayed.
2 Push the Full Span softkey.
The leftmost frequency changes to 0 Hz and the rightmost
frequency to 4 GHz.
Performing
measurements in the
time domain
Measurements on a selected center frequency can also be displayed
in the time domain.
1 From the main menu, push the Freq softkey.
The Frequency menu is displayed.
2 Push the Center softkey and enter the desired center frequency;
close the input field by selecting the appropriate unit with one of
the enter keys.
3 Push the Zero Span softkey.
The horizontal axis becomes the time axis. The scale width is identical to the sweep time. See Figure 17 on page 59 for an example.
Selecting the step size
for the frequency input
The center, start and stop frequencies can be set by either entering a
new value with the numeric keys, or by using the arrow keys (UP,
DOWN) to increase or decrease the current setting. The step size for an
arrow keypress can be either automatically selected by the 9101, or
manually adjusted.
Manually setting the frequency step size
1 From the main menu, select Freq.
2 Push the FStep key.
The Freq Step entry field opens.
52
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Selecting RBW, VBW and SWT
3 Enter a new frequency step value and close the entry field by
pressing the appropriate enter key determining the unit (GHZ/DBM
for gigahertz, MHZ/DB/ΜS for megahertz, KHZ/DBΜV/MS for kilohertz, or ENTER for hertz).
The auto/manual selection switches to manual and the selected
frequency step size is displayed on the softkey.
Setting the frequency step size selection to automatic
1 From the main menu, select Freq.
2 Push the FStep softkey several times until the “auto” selection is
highlighted.
Selecting RBW, VBW and SWT
The resolution bandwidth (RBW) is the 3 dB bandwidth of the IF filter
for selecting the signal to be measured. The resolution bandwidth
describes the ability of the spectrum analyzer to discriminate between
adjacent signals of similar amplitude. Only signals spaced at a
frequency of more than the RBW can be discriminated from one
another.
The 9101 can be set to automatically select the resolution bandwidth,
depending on the frequency span.
The video bandwidth (VBW) is the lowpass bandwidth over which
several results for one frequency point are smoothened. The lower the
video bandwidth, the smoother the signal curve and the less variations
there are.
The 9101 can be set to select the video bandwidth automatically as a
function of the resolution bandwidth.
The sweep time (SWT) determines how long it takes for a complete
sweep over the measured frequency range (span).
The 9101 can be set to automatically select the sweep time, depending
on RBW and VBW. If manually set, the sweep time should be selected
long enough for the filtered signal to reach steady state. The 9101 will
output an “UNCALibrated” warning if the sweep time is too low.
To set the resolution bandwidth, the video bandwidth or the sweep
time, proceed as follows:
1 In the main menu, select the appropriate softkey (RBW, VBW, or
SWT).
2 Enter the value and complete the entry with the appropriate enter
key for the unit, select a new value with the help of the UP/DOWN
cursor keys, or switch to auto to leave the setting to the 9101.
Changing between automatic and manual mode
Push the appropriate softkey (RBW, VBW, or SWT) several times until
the desired selection (auto or manual) is highlighted.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
53
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the level parameters
Setting up the level parameters
The accuracy and the dynamic range between the measured signal
and the noise floor depend on the proper setting of the level settings.
These consist of the reference level and the attenuation.
The reference level basically determines the level at the top of the
display. The vertical axis is divided into eight horizontal lines; you can
adjust the scale (which defaults to 10 dB per line) to your preferences.
The attenuation setting can be coupled to automatically follow the
reference level setting. For reference levels of –20 dBm and lower, the
attenuation is set to 10 dB; the maximum attenuation is 50 dB.
Attenuation or gain due to external coupling can be compensated by
frequency-dependent coupling factors, so that the displayed measurement values reflect the power at the device under test.
WARNING
The maximum input power level at the RF IN connector is 30 dBm
(1 W). Higher input levels may result in serious damage of the instrument.
Setting the reference
level
1 In the main menu, push the Ref. softkey or select Level followed by
Ref. Alternatively, push the REF function key.
The reference level input field opens.
2 Enter the new reference level either using the numeric keys,
closing the input field with the appropriate enter key, or with the
UP/DOWN arrow keys.
The new reference level appears at the top of the vertical axis. The
reference is based on the actually set output power.
Setting the hardware
attenuation
1 In the main menu, push the Attenuation softkey.
The Attenuation input field opens.
2 Enter a new attenuation value in the range from 0 to 50 dB (in
10 dB steps) and close the input field with one of the enter keys, or
use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the attenuation value in the
range 10 to 50 dB.
If the attenuation value is changed, the attenuation option will
change to “manual”.
NOTE
The attenuation value of 0 dB can be set only with the numeric keys
to avoid accidental deactivation. The 0 dB setting should be selected
carefully because too high input levels at the input may damage the
instrument.
54
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the level parameters
NOTE
For precision measurements, the input level subtracted by the attenuation should not exceed –23 dBm.
Changing the vertical
scale
The scale for the vertical axis (power) can be changed in the range
from 1 to 20 dB per division (vertical line in the displayed grid) in 1-35 steps as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Level.
2 Push the Scale softkey.
The Scale input field opens.
3 Select a new scale by entering a new number of dB per division
numerically and pressing the ENTER or MHZ/DB/ΜS key, or by
pushing the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
Selecting the level unit
for input and output
1 In the main menu, select Level > Units.
2 You can use logarthmic or linear units. In order to toggle the
display between logarithmic and linear units press the Unit softkey
in the lower right corner of the display and select log or lin.
3 You can now choose between the following units via the Unit
softkey in the upper right corner of the display.
Logarithmic units: dBM, dBμV, dBmV and dBV
Linear units: V, mV, μV, mW, μW.
Compensating gains and
losses
If the device under test is connected to the 9101 Handheld Spectrum
Analyzer via an amplifier or a device attenuating the signal, such as an
antenna or a long cable, the measurement results are wrong by the
gain or loss factor. This factor may be a constant or even frequencydependent.
To view the correct measurement results, the gain or loss can be
compensated. The 9101 can even compensate a frequency-dependent factor; a correction curve or table can be entered on an external
PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software and loaded to the 9101.
The section “Defining and loading external coupling parameters” on
page 187 explains this part in more detail.
Enabling external device
compensation
Once correction values are stored in the 9101, they can be selected
and activated as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Level > Ext. Dev. Memory.
2 Push Recall Ext. Dev. Comp.
A pull-down menu appears with a list of names for the compensation tables available in the 9101.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
55
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Changing the input impedance
3 Select a compensation table using the UP/DOWN cursor keys and
confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
Compensation is still off, but the 9101 changes automatically to the
Level menu.
4 Push the Ext. Dev. Comp. softkey until “on” is highlighted.
The text “Ext. Dev.”, together with the name of the file loaded,
appears on the upper left-hand corner of the results display.
NOTE
If a file was selected previously, steps 1 thru 3 can be omitted. In this
case, select Level and continue with step 4.
Turning external device
compensation off
Deleting files for external
device compensation
1 From the main menu, select Level.
2 Press Ext. Dev. Comp. until “off” is highlighted.
The text “Ext. Dev.” to the left of the results display disappears.
You can delete files containing compensation parameters as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Level > Ext. Dev. Memory.
2 a. To delete an individual compensation file from the 9101 memory,
push Delete Ext. Dev. Comp. Select a file name and press ENTER.
The compensation file is deleted from the list. Note that there will
be no warning; once you have selected and requested a file to be
deleted, this will occur immediately.
b. To delete all the compensation files from the 9101, push Delete
All and confirm with ENTER.
All compensation files are deleted.
Changing the input impedance
Most RF applications are using an impedance of 50 other applications such as cable TV apply 75 The 9101 is designed with an input
impedance of 50 it can, however, be used for testing a device with
an impedance of 75  by using the software impedance switch. The
measurement results from the 50  input are recalculated to fit the
different impedance.
On the 9101, simply select the correct impedance value so that the
9101 can translate the internal measurement values to the power
before the coupler.
1 Connect the device under test to the 9101 Handheld Spectrum
Analyzer.
2 From the main menu, select Level.
3 In the vertical menu, select the impedance of the device, that
means select Impedance: 50  or Impedance: 75 , respectively.
New measurement results are presented with the new impedance
56
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Changing the input impedance
value taken into account. In addition, if the impedance is changed
to 75  and the power had been displayed in dBm, the new
measurements are shown in dBμV. If the impedance is changed to
50  and the power had been displayed in dBμV, the new
measurements are shown in dBm.
NOTE
Signal reflections on the cable between the 50  and the 75 
device affect the measurement accuracy of the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer. For more accurate results, Aeroflex recommends using an impedance converter; such a converter will cause
attenuation affecting the results. This attenuation can be compensated as explained in section “Compensating gains and losses” on
page 55.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
57
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Applying special functions on the signal
Applying special functions on the signal
This section shows how the measurement can be triggered, how the
number of measurements can be limited and how you can listen to the
sound of the demodulated signal.
Using a trigger
The 9101 can either start signal analysis at a random point in time, or
start the measurement when a given signal threshold is passed.
Starting measurements depending on the actual signal level is only
supported in zero span mode.
Selecting untriggered signal analysis
1 From the main menu push Freq > Trigger.
The Trigger menu appears.
2 Push the Free Run softkey.
The softkey is highlighted and the 9101 is ready for measurements
at random times.
Selecting a trigger threshold in the RF signal
1 From the main menu push Freq > Trigger.
The Trigger menu appears.
2 Push the Video softkey.
The Video softkey is highlighted and an input field for the trigger
level appears.
NOTE
The Video trigger is available in zero span mode only, otherwise the
softkey description is grayed out.
3 Enter the trigger level (in dBm) and complete the entry by pushing
either the GHZ/DBM or the ENTER key.
The trigger threshold is displayed at the power axis; the symbol
also indicates the slope (direction in which the signal passes the
threshold to start the measurement).
4 If necessary, change the slope between positive and negative
direction by pushing the Slope softkey.
The active slope is indicated at the power axis by the following
symbol (see also Figure 17):
58
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Applying special functions on the signal
.
Figure 17 Triggered measurement (in the time domain)
Using an external trigger
NOTE
The external trigger function is available for serial numbers
5004001 and higher.
In order to use a TTL trigger signal generated by an external device,
proceed as follows:
1 Connect the external device to the EXT. TRIG. connector on the top
of the instrument (see “EXT. REF. IN/ EXT. TRIG. connector” on
page 11).
2 In the the main menu, enter the Sweep menu by pushing Freq >
Trigger.
The Trigger menu appears.
3 Push the Extern softkey.
The softkey is highlighted.
After activating the external trigger the instrument waits to receive
an impulse. When an impulse is detected on the external trigger
entrance one sweep is performed. Afterwards the instrument waits
for the next trigger event.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
59
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Applying special functions on the signal
Performing a limited
number of
measurements
The 9101 can run measurements continuously or a defined number of
times. Limiting the number of measurements can be useful for statistical analyses.
1 From the main menu, select Freq > Sweep.
The Sweep menu appears.
2 Select the trigger mode: Push Cont. for continuous measurements
or Single for a limited number of measurements.
The selected trigger mode is highlighted.
3 To enter the number of measurements, push the Single Count
softkey, enter a number in the range from 1 to 1000 and press
ENTER.
If Trigger Mode is set to Single, the 9101 performs the defined
number of measurements and enters Hold mode.
– To restart single-mode measurements, push the HOLD/RUN function key or the Single softkey.
– To stop a continuous measurement, push the HOLD/RUN function
key. Push it again to resume measurements.
Demodulating an AM or
FM signal
The 9101 has the ability to demodulate an AM (amplitude modulation)
or FM (frequency modulation) signal and to output the signal at the
built-in loudspeaker. The signal should have a signal strength of at least
–50 dBm; the demodulation bandwidth is about 10 kHz.
The 9101 can be set to either demodulate one signal permanently, or
to toggle between the different frequencies. When set to permanently
demodulate one signal, the 9101 demodulates the signal at the center
position.
When the 9101 is set to toggle between frequencies, it uses the marker
frequencies (marker M1 is enabled if not already active). After
performing and displaying a new measurement, the 9101 demodulates
and outputs the received signal for a short duration. This duration is
selectable in the range from 1 to 10 seconds. The 9101 demodulates
the carrier at the marker position; the demodulated signal is output for
the selected duration. If more than one marker is active, demodulation
is resumed at the next marker frequency and so on until a piece of the
signal at all active markers has been demodulated. The process starts
anew with a new measurement.
The speaker volume can be selected as a percentage of the speaker’s
maximum capacity.
1 Set a marker to the center frequency of the signal to be demodulated (see section “Setting up the trace” on page 61).
2 From the main menu, select Freq > Demod.
The Demodulation menu appears.
3 Select the demodulation method (AM, FM, or Off ).
The selected method is highlighted.
60
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
4 Choose between permanent demodulation and intermittent
demodulation at multiple markers by pressing the respective
Demod softkey.
5 If demodulation at marker is selected, you can change the duration
of the output of the demodulated signal:
– Push the Duration softkey.
The Demod Duration input field opens.
– Enter the new duration using the numeric keys. Conclude the
entry with a push on one of the enter keys with the appropriate
unit: push KHZ/DBΜV/MS for milliseconds or ENTER for seconds.
6 To adjust the speaker volume, push the Volume softkey, enter a
new volume level from 0 to 100% and press ENTER.
Setting up the trace
Figure 18 Example of two traces
The trace functions provide different views of the measurements, for
example the actual measurement or an average over the last couple of
measurements. You can even select two different views of the
measurement. Another possibility is to compare the actual measurement with an older measurement which has been stored in the 9101
and loaded to one of the trace views (see section “Storing and loading
traces” on page 67).
The 9101 samples many measurements for each frequency point. With
the detector functions, you can define the method to select which of
the samples is displayed.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
61
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
Selecting the trace
mode
The 9101 has five different modes to display a trace:
– In actual mode, the 9101 shows a complete new measurement in
each trace. Subsequent traces are independent of each other.
– In hold mode, the last measurement is kept on the display;
measurements continue but are not displayed.
– In max hold mode, the 9101 takes new measurements and, for
each frequency point, compares the new measurement with the
previous result. If the new measurement value is higher than the
previous result, the new measurement value becomes the new
result value; otherwise the old result value is kept. This way, the
highest result since the start of the Max hold measurement (or a
parameter change) is kept and displayed.
– Similarly, in min hold mode, the 9101 takes new measurements and
compares the new measurement with the previous result. If the
new measurement value is lower than the previous result, the new
measurement value becomes the new result value; otherwise the
old result value is kept. This way, the lowest result since the start of
the Min hold measurement (or a parameter change) is kept and
displayed.
– In average mode, the new measurement and previous ones are
averaged for each frequency point displayed. The 9101 uses a
recursive algorithm for averaging.
To select whether you want to view an actual measurement, stop and
hold the last measurement, see the lowest or highest data for each
frequency or an average value, proceed as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Trace.
2 Select the trace you want to modify (Trace A or Trace B) using the
horizontal softkeys.
3 Select the trace mode with the vertical softkeys (Actual, Hold, Max
hold, Min hold, Average).
The trace mode is shown at the left-hand side of the vertical axis,
e.g. A (ACT).
NOTE
For fastest valid results it is advisable to briefly activate the actual
mode before selecting any other mode.
NOTE
When the trace is on hold, the measurement and failure counters
continue counting. A second trace, if active, continues updating.
62
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
Turning the second trace
on and off
You can define two different trace views, e.g. one with the actual values
and one with the maximum values. While the first view (Trace A) is
always active, the second can be switched off. The functions of turning
Trace B on or off and selecting the trace mode are combined as
follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace B.
2 To turn trace B on, select the trace mode (Actual, Hold, Max hold,
Min hold, or Average). To turn trace B off, select Off.
If activated, the trace mode is displayed left to the vertical axis, e.g.
B (MAX).
Subtracting trace B from
trace A
If you have used two different trace views as described above, you can
show the difference between trace A and trace B by subtracting trace
B from trace A as follows:
1 In the Trace menu select the softkey Trace Function followed by the
softkey Subtract A – B  A.
2 Select on to subtract trace B from trace A. On the left-hand side of
the result area the term “Subtract“ will now be displayed to indicate
that a mathematical function is being performed.
3 The result is displayed in trace A.
NOTE
If trace A is on Hold, this function is not available and thus the
Subtract A – B  A softkey is greyed out.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
63
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
Figure 19 Subtract A – B  A on
Adding trace B to
trace A
NOTE
This function is available for serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
If you have used two different trace views, you can also show the sum
of
trace A and trace B by adding the two traces as follows:
1 In the Trace menu select the softkey Trace Function followed by the
softkey Add A + B  A.
2 Select on to add B to trace A. On the left-hand side of the result
area the term “Add“ will now be displayed to indicate that a mathematical function is being performed.
3 The result is displayed in trace A.
64
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
Defining the number of
measurements for
averaging
When the trace mode is set to averaging, it may be useful to adjust the
number of measurements over which the 9101 averages the results.
The average count value that can be defined in the Trace menus
applies to both traces alike.
The 9101 uses a recursive algorithm in which a new result is added to
the older averages with a weighting factor; the description below indicates how to change this weighting factor.
1 Enter the Trace menu (select Trace > Trace A or Trace B from the
main menu).
2 Push the Average Count softkey.
The Average input field opens.
3 Enter the number of measurements over which to average the
results, in the range from 2 to 128.
4 Press ENTER.
Selecting the detection
method
For each new measurement, the 9101 selects one or two values from
a number of measurements for each frequency value. The method is
user-definable; the following methods are available (see also
Figure 20):
– Positive/negative peak: Both the largest and smallest values are
taken and displayed as a vertical bar.
– Positive peak: Only the largest value is displayed.
– Negative peak: The smallest value is shown.
– Sample: A sample measurement value is picked.
– If the 9132 RMS Detector Option is installed and activated on your
9101, the root mean square detector showing the RMS-effective
level of the measured signal is also available. If the 9132 RMS
Detector Option is not installed on your instrument, the RMS
detector will be greyed out.
Figure 20 Trace detectors
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
65
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Setting up the trace
The detection method applies to both traces. Select the detection
method as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Detect.
2 Select the trace method from the Detector section of the vertical
softkeys.
The selected detection method is indicated at the left-hand side of
the display.
Copying traces inside
the 9101
You can copy an actual measurement from trace A to trace B or vice
versa; this way you can keep the last measurement results on the
screen and at the same time continue measuring or change the
settings of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. The previous results
in the target trace will be erased; the target trace will assume hold
mode.
To copy the measurement data from one trace to another, proceed as
follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Function.
2 To copy the measurement results in trace A to trace B, press
Copy A  B.
To copy results from trace B to trace A, press Copy B  A.
Figure 21 Trace Function menu
NOTE
If you first press Copy A  B, then Copy B  A (or vice versa), both
traces will display the same results and will be in hold mode.
66
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Storing and loading traces
Storing and loading traces
Figure 22 Trace A menu
The 9101 provides the capability to store up to 99 traces in the 9101
and load them again at random. The stored trace can then be examined or compared to a recent measurement. In addition, stored traces
can also be transferred to a PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software which is delivered with the 9101. For details on the software refer
to Chapter 8 “9100 Data Exchange Software”.
Storing a trace
You can store either trace A and trace B. Any trace can be stored under
a name with up to 11 characters. The procedure to enter text in alphanumerical input fields is explained in section “Entering numbers and
text” on page 23. Note that along with the trace, the instrument settings
such as frequency range, level range and markers are stored.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Push either Store Trace.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter a name for the trace.
Below the input field, a list of existing traces is indicated.
3 Enter a name for the trace. To use a modified trace name, you can
move the cursor to a suitable trace name with the UP/DOWN cursor
keys. The selected trace name also appears in the input field; use
the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
position within the trace name to enter additional characters or
delete existing ones.
4 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the trace is stored under the selected
name.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
67
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Storing and loading traces
Reusing a trace name
Reloading a trace
You cannot overwrite an existing trace using the same trace name. If
you want to reuse a trace name, you will have to delete the old trace
first.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Push Recall Trace.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter the trace name. Below
the input field, a list of existing traces is indicated.
3 Enter the name of the trace to load, or choose one with the UP/
DOWN cursor keys.
4 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the trace is displayed.
NOTE
Along with the trace, the 9101 also loads the settings that were used
when the trace was saved. These will overwrite the current settings
such as frequency range, reference level and markers.
Deleting a trace
Stored traces can be deleted. Note that there will be no warning; once
you have selected and requested a file to be deleted, this will occur
immediately.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Push Delete Trace.
An input field for the name of the trace to be deleted appears,
together with a trace selection box.
3 Select the trace to be deleted using the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
Alternatively, enter the trace name with the numeric keys.
4 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The trace is deleted from the trace list.
5 Select another trace for deletion, or press ESCAPE to leave the
entry field and the trace selection box.
Deleting all traces
Instead of deleting traces individually, all traces can be deleted in one
step. You will be asked to confirm this step.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Press Delete All.
A query appears, asking you to confirm your selection.
3 Press ENTER to have all traces deleted.
The query disappears. All traces are deleted.
68
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Special measurement functions
Special measurement functions
Within spectrum analysis mode, three different frequency-selective
types of power measurements are supported:
– Channel power
– Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR)
– Occupied bandwidth (OBW)
These are similar to the measurement types in channel power mode
(see chapter “Channel Power Operation” on page 75), without the
restrictions that the channel power mode poses with predefined
parameters such as span and resolution bandwidth.
Channel power
This measurement includes the power of the selected channel. A
channel is defined by center frequency and channel width (not the
span in this case); see “Changing the channel width” on page 72.
The 9101 displays the numerical result of the channel power measurement on the top-left. The measured bandwidth is indicated graphically
with bandwidth boundaries shown in red.
Adjacent channel power
ratio (ACPR)
ACPR is the relation between the power transmitted in a neighboring
(upper and/or lower) channel and that in the communication channel
used. The measurement can be used to assess the quality of the modulator and the transmitter. The higher the result, the worse the transmitter because transmission in other channels may interfere with
another ongoing communication.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
69
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Special measurement functions
The 9101 determines the adjacent channels by the channel width and
channel spacing input parameters (see sections “Changing the channel
spacing” and “Changing the channel width” on page 72). It displays the
numerical results of the adjacent channel power ratio measurements
for the left (lower) and right (upper) channels on the top-left. The
measured bands are indicated graphically with bandwidth boundaries
shown in red.
Occupied bandwidth
(OBW)
The occupied bandwidth identifies the frequency range into which a
given percentage of the signal power falls. The frequency range is not
necessarily symmetric around the center frequency but is selected so
that the bandwidth to hold a certain user-defined OBW percentage is
minimized. See section “Changing the occupied bandwidth
percentage” on page 72.
OBW is indicated as an absolute value in the upper left-hand corner of
the display, together with the OBW percentage; marker A1 and delta
marker DA2 are assigned the lower and upper frequencies characterizing the frequency range. The power is measured over three times the
normal channel bandwidth. The red boundary indicators mark the
normal channel bandwidth as selected in the Channel System menu.
70
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Special measurement functions
NOTE
If the selected resolution bandwidth is high and the occupied bandwidth very low, there may be rare cases in which all the power for
the occupied bandwidth is mapped to one point in the spectrum display. In such a case, the 9101 displays “N/A” (not available) instead
of the bandwidth, and the markers usually indicating the bandwidth
boundaries are invisible.
Increase the occupied bandwidth or decrease the resolution bandwidth to receive results.
Selecting the
measurement type
To select the type of measurement within spectrum analysis mode,
proceed as follows:
1 From the Spectrum Analysis main menu, select Measure.
2 Select a measurement type using the vertically aligned softkeys in
the Measure section.
The numerical result for the selected measurement appears in the
upper left-hand corner of the display.
Switching special
measurement functions
off
To return to normal spectrum analysis measurements without special
measurement functions, simply press the softkey of the selected
measurement type again. This will deactivate the special measurements.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
71
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Special measurement functions
Changing the channel
width
The channel width is the bandwidth which the transmission is expected
to occupy. It can be set for channel power and ACPR measurements as
follows:
1 From the Spectrum Analysis main menu, select Measure.
2 Press Channel Width, enter a new value and press the respective
enter key for the unit.
The new measurement bandwidth for channel power and ACPR is
displayed with the softkey.
Changing the channel
spacing
The channel spacing is distance in frequency between two adjacent
channels. It can be set for the ACPR measurements as follows:
1 From the Spectrum Analysis main menu, select Measure.
2 Press Channel Spacing, enter a new value and press the respective
enter key for the unit.
The new channel spacing for ACPR is displayed with the softkey.
Reading the channel
power
Changing the occupied
bandwidth percentage
In addition to the display elements explained on page 13, the channel
power mode also includes a large display of the channel power, along
with the channel, resolution bandwidth and sweep time. Please see the
graphs on page 69 and the following for typical measurements.
OBW measurements identify the frequency range in which a certain
percentage of the transmit power falls. The percentage value can be
changed as follows:
1 From the Spectrum Analysis main menu, select Measure.
2 Press % OBW and enter a new percentage value in the range from
5 to 99.
3 Push ENTER to close the input field.
If the OBW measurement type is selected, the new OBW
percentage value is indicated in the upper left-hand corner of the
display.
The 9101 recalculates the frequency range based on the new
percentage value.
72
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Viewing the spectrum analysis mode parameters
Changing general
analyzer parameters
For the channel power, ACPR and OBW measurements within the spectrum
analysis mode, the general settings such as center frequency, span,
resolution bandwidth, can be changed as usual. A single-button
approach to adjusting span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth,
detector and trace mode is described below.
1 From the Spectrum Analysis main menu, select Measure.
2 Press Adjust Settings.
Resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are automatically set to
optimum values (automatic mode). The trace detector is set to
sample and the trace mode is set to actual.
If channel power measurements are selected, the span is set to
120% of the selected channel width. For ACPR measurements, the
span is adjusted to 1.2  channel width + 2  channel spacing. The
OBW span is three times the channel width.
Viewing the spectrum analysis mode parameters
You can get an overview of all parameters set for this mode in the
Parameter Window. To view the parameters, press the PARAM function
key. To close the Parameter Window and return to the menu you
opened it from, press the ESCAPE function key, the Exit softkey or the
PARAM function key. To close the parameter page and change to the
relevant main menu press the Main softkey.
Figure 23 Spectrum analysis mode parameters
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
73
Chapter 3 Spectrum Analysis Operation
Viewing the spectrum analysis mode parameters
74
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4
Channel Power Operation
4
This chapter describes the instrument’s functions in channel power
measurement mode. Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:
– “About the channel power mode” on page 76
– “Selecting the measurement mode” on page 79
– “Operating in channel power mode” on page 80
– “Reading the channel power” on page 81
– “Changing the occupied bandwidth percentage” on page 81
– “Working with communication systems and frequency settings” on
page 81
– “Setting up the level parameters” on page 84
– “Changing the input impedance” on page 87
– “Setting up the trace” on page 88
– “Storing and loading traces” on page 93
– “Viewing the channel power mode parameters” on page 95
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
75
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
About the channel power mode
About the channel power mode
The 9101 offers different measurement modes, e.g. spectrum analysis
and channel power measurements. The channel power mode allows
you to measure the radiated power within a certain frequency band
with a single button press. This mode reduces the complexity of all the
setup possibilities for defined communication systems. Several
communication systems are predefined in the 9101 or can be downloaded from a PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software; see section
“Managing communication systems for channel power measurements”
on page 189 for more details.
Within channel power mode, three different frequency-selective types
of power measurements are supported, for details on selecting the
measurement type refer to “Selecting the measurement mode” on
page 79:
– Channel power
– Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR)
– Occupied bandwidth (OBW)
These measurement types are available both in channel power and in
spectrum analysis mode. However, in contrast to the spectrum analysis
mode, which looks at the power level at a certain frequency, the
channel power mode uses a system approach. A system consists of
several channels, each channel has a unique channel number assigned
to it. Within a system the channels have the same bandwidth and
channel spacing. Depending on the system the channels may overlap,
follow each other directly or be separated by spaces.
In order to distinctly specify a system the following parameters have to
be set on the 9101:
– First channel
– Last channel
– Channel width
– Channel spacing
– First frequency
76
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
About the channel power mode
You can define systems and store them on the 9101. However, you can
also make use of predefined systems available on the instrument. For
a complete listing of the communication systems preinstalled on the
instrument refer to “Preinstalled systems on the 9101” on page 213.
Channel power
This measurement includes the power of the selected channel. The
channel can be selected in the main menu whereas parameters like
channel width (the measurement bandwidth) and channel spacing can
be viewed and changed in the Channel System menu.
The 9101 displays the numerical result of the channel power measurement on the top-left. The measured bandwidth is indicated graphically
with bandwidth boundaries shown in red.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
77
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
About the channel power mode
Adjacent channel power
ratio (ACPR)
ACPR is the relation between the power transmitted in a neighboring
(upper or lower) channel and that in the channel used for communication. The measurement can be used to assess the quality of the modulator and the transmitter; the higher the result, the worse the
transmitter because transmission in other channels may interfere with
another ongoing communication.
The 9101 displays the numerical results of the adjacent channel power
ratio measurements for the left (lower) and right (upper) channels on
the top-left. The measured bands are indicated graphically with bandwidth boundaries shown in red.
For further details on the selection and availability of the ACPR
measurement type refer to “Selecting the measurement mode” on
page 79.
Occupied bandwidth
(OBW)
The occupied bandwidth identifies the frequency range into which a
given percentage of the signal power falls. The frequency range is not
necessarily symmetric around the center frequency but is selected so
that the bandwidth to hold a certain user-defined OBW percentage is
minimized. See section “Changing the occupied bandwidth
percentage” on page 81.
OBW is indicated as an absolute value in the upper left-hand corner of
the display, together with the OBW percentage; marker A1 and delta
marker DA2 are assigned the lower and upper frequencies characterizing the frequency range. The power is measured over three times the
normal channel bandwidth. The red boundary indicators mark the
normal channel bandwidth as selected in the Channel System menu.
78
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Selecting the measurement mode
NOTE
If the selected resolution bandwidth is high and the occupied bandwidth very low, there may be rare cases in which all the power for
the occupied bandwidth is mapped to one point in the spectrum display. In such a case, the 9101 displays “N/A” (not available) instead
of the bandwidth, and the markers usually indicating the bandwidth
boundaries are invisible.
Increase the occupied bandwidth to receive results.
Selecting the measurement mode
To select the channel power mode, proceed as follows:
1 Push the MODE function key.
2 Select the Channel Power softkey.
The main menu of the channel power mode appears. If you select a
new mode, all parameters are set to the values used when the
mode was last active. If, however, you resume the last active mode,
the measurements continue without any changes to the parameters.
To select the type of measurement within the channel power mode,
proceed as follows:
1 Push the Measure softkey.
2 Select a measurement type using the vertically aligned function
softkeys (Channel Power, ACPR, or OBW).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
79
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Operating in channel power mode
NOTE
Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) measurements are available
only in those communication systems where the channel bandwidth
does not exceed the channel spacing; otherwise, the measurement
range of the adjacent channel would overlap with that in the
selected channel.
As an alternative, use the ACPR measurements within the spectrum
analysis mode (page 69).
Operating in channel power mode
Figure 24 Example of a channel power measurement
This mode provides a measurement of the integral power within a
given bandwidth. The measurement mode can be selected as
described on page 79.
In channel power mode, the frequency parameters, filters and sweep
time cannot be selected individually. Instead, a communication system
can be selected or defined in which the 9101 shall measure the
channel power; the frequency parameters are stored with the communication system settings.
A few communication systems such as GSM are predefined in the
9101. More predefined system settings are available in the 9100 Data
Exchange Software and can be downloaded to the 9101. In addition,
the settings for an alternative communication system can be defined by
the user, stored in the 9101 and recalled for channel power measurements.
80
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Reading the channel power
Reading the channel power
In addition to the display elements explained on page 14, the channel
power mode also includes a large display of the channel power, along
with the channel, resolution bandwidth and sweep time. In the example
in Figure 24 on page 80, the 9101 indicates the frequency range over
which the channel power is measured between red vertical bars.
Changing the occupied bandwidth percentage
OBW measurements identify the frequency range in which a certain
percentage of the transmit power falls. The percentage value can be
changed as follows:
1 From the Channel Power main menu, select Channel System.
2 Press % OBW and enter a new percentage value in the range from
5 to 99.
3 Press ENTER to close the input field.
If the OBW measurement type is selected, the new OBW
percentage value is indicated in the upper left-hand corner of the
display.
The 9101 recalculates the frequency range based on the new
percentage value.
NOTE
The occupied bandwidth can also be changed via the Measure
menu.
Working with communication systems and frequency settings
Selecting a
communication system
on the 9101
You can activate communication system settings stored on the 9101 as
follows:
1 In the main menu of the channel power mode, select Ch. System >
System Memory.
The System Memory menu appears.
2 Press Recall System.
A scroll box appears, showing the available communication
systems. Enter the system name as stored in the 9101, or move the
UP/DOWN cursor keys to move the cursor to the system to be
measured.
3 Press ENTER to confirm.
The input field and the scroll box disappear and the spectrum of
the selected band is measured. The channel power of the first
channel is displayed in the upper left-hand corner.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
81
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Working with communication systems and frequency settings
The 9101 comes with preinstalled communication systems. For a listing
of all the channel systems preinstalled on the 9101 refer to “Preinstalled systems on the 9101” on page 213.
NOTE
Apart from the channel width the parameters for preinstalled configuration systems cannot be modified.
Setting up a new
communication system
A new communication system can be defined in terms of frequency
range, channel bandwidth and spacing, and channel numbering; channels can then be addressed easily by their channel number rather than
the carrier or center frequency. You can set up a new communication
system as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Ch. System.
The Channel System menu appears.
2 Press First Channel and enter the first channel number in use by
the system, then close the input field by pressing ENTER.
3 Press Last Channel to enter the number of the last channel in use
by the system; close the input field by pressing ENTER.
4 Press Channel Width to change the measurement bandwidth;
ensure to select the right unit (e.g. kHz).
5 Select the Channel Spacing softkey, enter the spacing between
channel numbers and close the input field by pressing the enter
key for the appropriate frequency unit.
6 Press the 1st Ch. Center softkey and enter the carrier frequency for
the first channel in use (channel number defined with the first
softkey). Close the input field using the enter key for the appropriate unit (e.g. MHZ).
7 For occupied bandwidth (OBW) measurements, select % OBW and
enter the percentage value. Confirm the value by pressing ENTER.
8 Select System Memory > Store System, enter a new name for the
system and press ENTER.
NOTE
Existing systems cannot be overwritten; you must delete the old system first.
If you delete a predefined system that is delivered with the 9101, it
can be restored as depicted in section “Undeleting default communication systems” on page 83.
82
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Working with communication systems and frequency settings
Deleting a
communication system
To delete a the communication system settings stored on the 9101,
take the following steps.
1 From the main menu, select Ch. System > System Memory.
The System Memory menu appears.
2 Push the Delete System softkey.
A scroll box with the list of available communication systems
appears.
3 Select the system settings to be deleted by moving the UP/DOWN
cursor keys to the respective system settings name, and confirm by
pressing ENTER.
The system settings are deleted from the list.
4 Press ESCAPE to close the input field and the scroll box.
Deleting all
communication systems
You can clean up previously stored communication systems and easily
delete all of them, including those that were originally delivered with
the 9101.
1 From the main menu, select Ch. System > System Memory.
The System Memory menu appears.
2 Push the Delete All softkey.
A box appears, asking you to confirm that you want to delete all
communication system settings.
3 Press ENTER to confirm deletion or ESCAPE to prevent the 9101
from deleting all the communication systems.
If confirmed, all the communication systems are deleted, that
means the list of communication systems will be empty.
Undeleting default
communication systems
If you have deleted communication systems that were delivered with
the 9101, you can restore these system settings.
1 From the main menu, select Ch. System > System Memory.
The System Memory menu appears.
2 Push the Restore Default Systems softkey.
The 9101 creates all the communication systems that were originally delivered with the 9101.
Using the 9100 Data
Exchange Software with
communication systems
With the 9100 Data Exchange Software, more communication systems
can be defined, loaded to the 9101 and selected for use. See section
“Managing communication systems for channel power measurements”
on page 189 for more information. Furthermore, within the 9100 Data
Exchange Software fruther predefined communication systems are
available for transfer to your 9101. For a listing of the communication
systems available refer to “Predefined systems in the 9100 Data
Exchange Software” on page 214.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
83
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Changing the sweep time
Defining the frequency
span
The 9101 can display either the full spectrum used by the system, or
the channel to be measured. Select the frequency span as desired:
In the main menu, select either Full System or Single Channel.
If you select Full System, the full frequency band as defined for the
communication system will be displayed. If you select Single
Channel, only the frequency range of the currently selected
channel will be shown.
Changing the channel
1 In the main menu, push the Channel softkey.
The Channel input field opens.
2 Enter the desired channel number within the communication
system at hand, or select the channel number with the UP/DOWN
cursor keys.
3 Press ENTER to confirm.
The channel power for the selected channel is indicated in the
upper left-hand corner.
Changing the sweep time
The sweep time (SWT) determines how long it takes for a complete
sweep over the measured frequency range (span).
By default, the 9101 automatically selects the sweep time depending
on other measurement parameters such as the span. In some cases it
may be an advantage to manually select a different sweep time. This is
the case with pulsed signals where a longer sweep time may increase
the measurement accuracy. If manually set, the sweep time should be
selected long enough for the filtered signal to reach steady state. The
9101 will output an “UNCALibrated” warning if the sweep time is too
low.
To change the sweep time in channel power mode, proceed as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Measure.
2 Push the SWT softkey.
3 Enter the new sweep time and confirm with the appropriate enter
key for the unit.
Setting up the level parameters
The accuracy and the dynamic range between the measured signal
and the noise floor depend on the proper setting of the level settings.
These consist of the reference level and the attenuation.
The reference level basically determines the level at the top of the
display. The vertical axis is divided into eight horizontal rows; you can
adjust the scale (which defaults to 10 dB per line) to your preferences.
84
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the level parameters
The attenuation setting can be coupled to automatically follow the
reference level setting. For reference levels of –20 dBm and lower, the
attenuation is set to 10 dB; the maximum attenuation is 50 dB.
Attenuation or gain due to external coupling can be compensated by
frequency-dependent coupling factors, so that the displayed measurement values reflect the power at the device under test.
WARNING
The maximum allowable input power level at the RF IN connector is
30 dBm (1 W). Higher input levels may result in serious damage of
the instrument.
Setting the reference
level
1 In the main menu, push the Ref. softkey or select Level followed by
Ref. Alternatively, push the REF function key.
The Reference Level input field opens.
2 Enter the new reference level either using the numeric keys,
closing the input field with the appropriate enter key, or with the
UP/DOWN arrow keys.
The new reference level appears at the top of the vertical axis. The
reference is based on the actually set output power.
Setting the hardware
attenuation
1 In the main menu, push the Attenuation softkey.
The Attenuation input field opens.
2 Enter a new attenuation value in the range from 0 to 50 dB (in
10 dB steps) and close the input field with one of the enter keys, or
use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the attenuation value in the
range from 10 to 50 dB.
If the attenuation value is changed, the attenuation option will
change to “auto”.
NOTE
The attenuation value of 0 dB can be set only with the numeric keys
to avoid accidental deactivation. The 0 dB setting should be selected
carefully because input levels that are too high at the input may
damage the instrument.
NOTE
For precision measurements, the input level subtracted by the attenuation should not exceed –23 dBm.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
85
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the level parameters
Changing the vertical
scale
The scale for the vertical axis (power) can be changed in the range
from 1 to 20 dB per division (vertical line in the displayed grid) in 1-35 steps as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Level.
2 Push the Scale softkey.
The Scale input field opens.
3 Select a new scale by entering a new number of dB per division
numerically and pressing the ENTER or MHZ/DB/ΜS key, or by
pushing the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
Selecting the level unit
for input and output
1 In the main menu, select Level > Units.
2 You can use logarthmic or linear units. In order to toggle the
display between logarithmic and linear units press the Unit softkey
in the lower right corner of the display and select log or lin.
3 You can now choose between the following units via the Unit
softkey in the upper right corner of the display.
Logarithmic units: dBm, dBμV, dBmV and dBV
Linear units: V, mV, μV, mW, μW.
Compensating gains and
losses
If the device under test is connected to the 9101 Handheld Spectrum
Analyzer via an amplifier or a device atttenuating the signal, such as an
antenna or a long cable, the measurement results are wrong by the
gain or loss factor. This factor may be a constant or even frequencydependent.
To view the correct measurement results, the gain or loss can be
compensated. The 9101 can even compensate a frequency-dependent factor; a correction curve or table can be entered on an external
PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software and loaded to the 9101.
Section “Defining and loading external coupling parameters” on
page 187 explains this part in more detail.
Enabling external device
compensation
Once correction values are stored in the 9101, these can be selected
and activated as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Level > Ext. Dev. Memory.
2 Press Recall Ext. Dev. Comp.
A pull-down menu appears with a list of names for the compensation tables available in the 9101.
3 Select a compensation table using the UP/DOWN cursor keys and
confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
4 Select the Level menu and push the Ext. Dev. Comp. softkey until
“On” is highlighted.
The text “Ext. Dev.” appears to the left of the results display.
86
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Changing the input impedance
Turning external device
compensation off
Deleting files for external
device compensation
1 In the main menu, select Level.
2 Push Ext. Dev. Comp. until “Off” is highlighted.
The text “Ext. Dev.” to the left of the results display disappears.
You can delete files containing compensation parameters as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Level > Ext. Dev. Memory.
2 a. To delete an individual compensation file from the 9101 memory,
press Delete Ext. Dev. Comp. Select a file name and press ENTER.
The compensation file is deleted from the list. Note that there will
be no warning; once you have selected and requested a file to be
deleted, this will occur immediately.
b. To delete all the compensation files from the 9101, push Delete
All and confirm by pressing ENTER.
All compensation files are deleted.
Changing the input impedance
Most RF applications are using an impedance of 50 other applications such as cable TV apply 75 The 9101 is designed with an input
impedance of 50 it can, however, be used for testing a device with
an impedance of 75  by using the software impedance switch. The
measurement results from the 50  input are recalculated to fit the
different impedance.
On the 9101, simply select the correct impedance value so that the
9101 can translate the internal measurement values to the power
before the coupler.
1 To connect a 75  device, connect the device under test to the
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
2 In the main menu, select Level.
3 In the vertical menu, select the impedance of the device, that
means select Impedance: 50  or Impedance: 75 , respectively.
New measurement results are presented with the new impedance
value taken into account. In addition, if the impedance is changed
to 75  and the power had been displayed in dBm, the new
measurements are shown in dBμV. If the impedance is changed to
50  and the power had been displayed in dBμV, the new
measurements are shown in dBm.
NOTE
Signal reflections on the cable between the 50  and the 75 
device affect the measurement accuracy of the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer. For more accurate results, Aeroflex recommends using an impedance converter; such a converter will cause
attenuation affecting the results. This attenuation can be compensated as explained in section “Compensating gains and losses” on
page 86.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
87
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the trace
Setting up the trace
Figure 25 Example of two traces in channel power mode
The trace functions provide different views of the measurements, for
example the actual measurement or an average over the last couple of
measurements. You can even select two different views of the
measurement. Another possibility is to compare the actual measurement with an older measurement which has been stored in the 9101
and loaded to one of the trace views (see section “Storing and loading
traces” on page 93).
The 9101 samples many measurements for each frequency point. With
the detector functions, you can define the method to select which of
the samples is displayed.
Selecting the trace
mode
The 9101 has five different modes to display a trace:
– In Actual mode, the 9101 shows a complete new measurement in
each trace. Subsequent traces are independent of each other.
– In hold mode, the last measurement is kept on the display;
measurements continue but are not displayed.
– In max hold mode, the 9101 takes new measurements and, for
each frequency point, compares the new measurement with the
previous result. If the new measurement value is higher than the
previous result, the new measurement value becomes the new
result value; otherwise the old result value is kept. This way, the
highest result since the start of the max hold measurement (or a
parameter change) is kept and displayed.
– Similarly, in min hold mode, the 9101 takes new measurements and
compares the new measurement with the previous result. If the
new measurement value is lower than the previous result, the new
88
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the trace
measurement value becomes the new result value; otherwise the
old result value is kept. This way, the lowest result since the start of
the min hold measurement (or a parameter change) is kept and
displayed.
– In average mode, the new measurement and previous ones are
averaged for each frequency point displayed. The 9101 uses a
recursive algorithm for averaging.
To select whether you want to view an actual measurement, stop and
hold the last measurement, see the lowest or highest data for each
frequency or an average value, proceed as follows:
1 In the main menu, select Trace.
2 Select the trace you want to modify (Trace A or Trace B) using the
horizontal softkeys.
3 Select the trace mode with the vertical softkeys (Actual, Hold, Max
hold, Min hold, Average).
The trace mode is shown at the left-hand side of the vertical axis,
e.g. A (ACT).
NOTE
For fastest valid results it is advisable to briefly activate the actual
mode before selecting any other mode.
NOTE
When the trace is on hold, the measurement and failure counters
continue counting. A second trace, if active, continues updating.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
89
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the trace
Turning the second trace
on and off
You can define two different trace views, e.g. one with the actual values
and one with the maximum values. While the first view (Trace A) is
always active, the second can be switched off. The functions of turning
Trace B on or off and selecting the trace mode are combined as
follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace B.
2 To turn trace B on, select the trace mode (Actual, Hold, Max hold,
Min hold, or Average). To turn trace B off, select Off.
If activated, the trace mode is displayed left to the vertical axis, e.g.
B (MAX).
Subtracting trace B from
trace A
If you have used two different trace views as described above, you can
show the difference between trace A and trace B by subtracting trace
B from trace A as follows:
1 In the Trace menu select the softkey Trace Function followed by the
softkey Subtract A – B  A.
2 Select on to subtract trace B from trace A. On the left-hand side of
the result area the Term “Subtract“ will now be displayed to indicate
that a mathematical function is being performed.
3 The result is displayed in trace A.
NOTE
If trace A is on Hold, this function is not available and thus the
Subtract A – B  A softkey is greyed out.
90
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the trace
Adding trace B to trace
A
NOTE
This function is available for serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
If you have used two different trace views, you can also show the sum
of trace A and trace B by adding the two traces as follows:
1 In the Trace menu select the softkey Trace Function followed by the
softkey Add A + B  A.
2 Select on to add B to trace A. On the left-hand side of the result
area the term “Add“ will now be displayed to indicate that a mathematical function is being performed. The result is displayed in trace
A.
Defining the number of
measurements for
averaging
When the trace mode is set to averaging, it may be useful to adjust the
number of measurements over which the 9101 averages the results.
The average count value that can be defined in the Trace menus
applies to both traces alike.
The 9101 uses a recursive algorithm in which a new result is added to
the older averages with a weighting factor; the description below indicates how to change this weighting factor.
1 Enter the Trace menu (select Trace > Trace A or Trace B from the
main menu).
2 Push the Average Count softkey.
The Average input field opens.
3 Enter the number of measurements over which to average the
results, in the range from 2 to 128.
4 Press ENTER.
Selecting the detection
method
In channel power mode, the detection method is set to Sample by
default. If the 9132 RMS Detector Option is installed and activated on
your 9101, the root mean square detector showing the RMS-effective
level of the measured signal is also available. In order to set the detection method to RMS proceed as follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Detect.
2 Select the RMS from the Detector section of the vertical softkeys.
The selected detection method is indicated at the left-hand side of
the display.
NOTE
If the 9132 RMS Detector Option is not installed on your 9101, the
RMS detector is greyed out.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
91
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Setting up the trace
Figure 26 Detect menu with activated 9132 RMS Detector
Option
Copying traces inside
the 9101
You can copy an actual measurement from trace A to trace B or vice
versa; this way you can keep the last measurement results on the
screen and at the same time continue measuring or change the
settings of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. The previous results
in the target trace will be erased; the target trace will assume hold
mode.
To copy the measurement data from one trace to another, proceed as
follows:
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Function.
2 To copy the measurement results from trace A to trace B, press
Copy A  B.
To copy results from trace B to trace A, press Copy B  A.
NOTE
If you first press Copy A  B, then Copy B  A (or vice versa), both
traces will display the same results and will be in hold mode.
92
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Storing and loading traces
Storing and loading traces
Figure 27 Trace A menu
The 9101 provides the capability to store up to 99 traces in the 9101
and load them again at random. The stored trace can then be examined or compared to a recent measurement. In addition, stored traces
can also be transferred to a PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software which is delivered with the 9101. For details on the software refer
to Chapter 8 “9100 Data Exchange Software”.
Storing a trace
You can store either trace A and B. Any trace can be stored under a
name with up to 11 characters. The procedure to enter text in alphanumerical input fields is explained in section “Entering numbers and text”
on page 23. Note that along with the trace, the instrument settings
such as frequency range, level range and markers are stored.
1 Activate the trace you want to store by pushing Trace > Trace A or
Trace B.
2 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
3 Push Store Trace.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter a name for the trace.
Below the input field, a list of existing traces is indicated.
4 Enter a name for the trace. To use a modified trace name, you can
move the cursor to a suitable trace name with the UP/DOWN cursor
keys. The selected trace name also appears in the input field; use
the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
position within the trace name to enter additional characters or
delete existing ones.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
93
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Storing and loading traces
5 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the trace is stored under the selected
name.
Reusing a trace name
Reloading a trace
You cannot overwrite an existing trace using the same trace name. If
you want to reuse a trace name, you will have to delete the old trace
first.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Push Recall Trace.
An input field opens, allowing you to enter the trace name. Below
the input field, a list of existing traces is indicated.
3 Enter the name of the trace to load, or choose one with the UP/
DOWN cursor keys.
4 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The input field closes and the trace is displayed.
NOTE
Along with the trace, the 9101 also loads the settings that were used
when the trace was saved. These will overwrite the current settings
such as frequency range, reference level and markers.
Deleting a trace
Stored traces can be deleted. Note that there will be no warning; once
you have selected and requested a file to be deleted, this will occur
immediately.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
2 Push Delete Trace.
An input field for the name of the trace to be deleted appears,
together with a trace selection box.
3 Select the trace to be deleted using the UP/DOWN cursor keys.
Alternatively, enter the trace name with the numeric keys.
4 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The trace is deleted from the trace list.
5 Select another trace for deletion, or press ESCAPE to leave the
entry field and the trace selection box.
Deleting all traces
Instead of deleting traces individually, all traces can be deleted in one
step. You will be asked to confirm this step.
1 From the main menu, select Trace > Trace Memory.
94
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Viewing the channel power mode parameters
2 Press Delete All.
A query appears, asking you to confirm your selection.
3 Press ENTER to have all traces deleted.
The query disappears. All traces are deleted.
Viewing the channel power mode parameters
You can get an overview of all parameters set for this mode in the
Parameter Window. To view the parameters, press the PARAM function
key. To close the Parameter Window and return to the menu you
opened it from, press the ESCAPE function key, the Exit softkey or the
PARAM function key. To close the parameter page and change to the
relevant main menu press the Main softkey.
Figure 28 Channel power mode parameters
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
95
Chapter 4 Channel Power Operation
Viewing the channel power mode parameters
96
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting
5
This chapter provides information on handling errors and problems
related to the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
97
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Handling system errors
Handling system errors
Should an error or problem occur that prevents you from controlling
the instrument and thus requires the instrument software to be set up
again, the 9101 offers the Setup Application Software menu. This menu
provides you with access to the instrument without starting the instrument software and enables you to perform a software update.
Chapter 6 “Updating the Instrument Software” contains a detailed
description of the processes involved in updating the instrument’s software via the Setup Application Software menu.
98
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 6
Updating the Instrument
Software
6
This chapter describes how to perform an update of the instrument’s
software via the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer’s Setup Application
Software menu. Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:
– “Entering the Setup Application Software menu” on page 100
– “Setting a password” on page 100
– “Performing a serial update” on page 101
– “Performing a LAN update” on page 103
– “Determining the Host IP address” on page 104
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
99
Chapter 6 Updating the Instrument Software
Entering the Setup Application Software menu
Entering the Setup Application Software menu
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer’s Setup Application Software
menu can be entered instead of automatically loading the instrument
software. This menu provides you with access to the instrument in case
an error or problem should occur that prevents you from controlling it
and requires the instrument software to be set up again. The menu
offers two options for the update process: Serial update and LAN
update. To enter the Setup Application Software menu, proceed as
follows:
1 Turn on the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
The boot-up screen appears.
2 When the message “Press 0 to enter Setup” appears, press the
numeric key 0.
The Setup Application Software menu appears.
Setting a password
In order to ensure that software updates are only performed by authorized users you can set a password to protect the software update
option. If a password is set, the user performing the software update
via the Setup Application Software menu will be asked to enter it before
data are loaded.
NOTE
This password only affects the software update options available on
the Setup Application Software menu. It does not affect the usage of
the instrument’s application software.
In order to set a password proceed as follows:
1 Switch on the 9101. In order to enter the Setup Application Software menu press the numeric key 0 when the input request
message is displayed on the boot-up screen. Now the Setup Application Software menu is displayed.
2 Press the numeric key 3 to open a password input field.
3 Enter a 6-digit numeric string as your password. For each digit you
enter an asterisk (*) will be displayed in the input field.
4 Press ENTER to submit your input. You will now be asked to reenter
your passwort for confirmation.
5 Press ENTER to submit your input. If your input is not identical to
the password entered in the first input field, an error message will
be displayed and you can enter the password again. Otherwise
your new password will be saved.
You can also change a previously defined password. In order to do so
proceed as described above. If a password has already been defined,
you will be asked automatically to enter the old password before you
can enter a new one.
100
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 6 Updating the Instrument Software
Performing a serial update
NOTE
If you have forgotten your password, please contact one of Aeroflex’s Technical Assistance Centers. For contact information please
refer to section “Technical assistance” on page xii.
NOTE
This function is available for serial numbers 5004001 and higher.
Performing a serial update
The software update requires a 9100 software update file, which is an
executable file running on a Windows PC that also includes the software update for your 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. Such a file
can be downloaded from Aeroflex’s website, e.g. the file
9100Setup_4_50.exe.
Take the following steps to perform a serial update of the instrument
software via the Setup Application Software menu:
1 Connect the 9101 to an external power supply.
2 Connect the 9101 to the PC. See section “Connecting the 9101
Handheld Spectrum Analyzer” on page 10 for further details.
3 Switch on the 9101.
The boot-up screen is displayed.
Aeroflex 9100 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
© Copyright 2010 Aeroflex GmbH
All rights reserved.
U.S. patent pending
Press “0” to enter Setup…
4 In order to enter the Setup Application Software menu press the
numeric key 0 when the input request message is displayed on the
boot-up screen.
Now the Setup Application Software menu is displayed.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
101
Chapter 6 Updating the Instrument Software
Performing a serial update
5 Press numeric key 1 to open the Serial Update menu.
6 In order to upload the application files from the PC to the instrument start the installation program on your PC. This will open the
Update window as shown below.
7 In the Connection section, select Serial.
8 To start the serial update press the numeric key 1 on the instrument.
102
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 6 Updating the Instrument Software
Performing a LAN update
NOTE
You do not have to click on Start in the Update window on your PC.
The update process will be started without any further input on the
PC.
Performing a LAN update
The software update requires a 9100 software update file, which is an
executable file running on a Windows PC that also includes the software update for your 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. Such a file
can be downloaded from Aeroflex’s website, e.g. the file
9100Setup_4_50.exe.
Take the following steps to perform a LAN update of the instrument’s
software via the Setup Application Software menu:
1 Connect the 9101 to an external power supply.
2 Connect the 9101 to the PC. See section “Connecting the 9101
Handheld Spectrum Analyzer” on page 10 for further details.
3 Switch on the 9101. In order to enter the Setup Application Software menu press the numeric key 0 when the input request
message is displayed on the boot-up screen. Now the Setup Application Software menu is displayed.
4 Press the numeric key 2 to open the LAN Update menu.
5 Here the IP adresses of the instrument (Target IP) and the PC (Host
IP) are displayed. Press the numeric key 1 to change or enter the
Host IP and 2 to change the Target IP. See section “Determining the
Host IP address” on page 104 for information on determining the
Host PC’s IP address.
6 In order to upload the application files from the PC to the instrument start the installation program on your PC. This will open the
Update window (see “Performing a serial update” on page 101).
NOTE
You do not have to click on Start in the Update window on your PC.
The update process will be started without any further input on the
PC.
7 In the Connection section, select LAN.
8 In order to start the update press the numeric key 6 on the instrument.
A message prompts you to press any key to start the update or to
hit the ESC key to abort the update.
9 Press the ENTER key to start the update.
Both the instrument and the installation program on the PC display
the progress of the software update.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
103
Chapter 6 Updating the Instrument Software
Determining the Host IP address
Determining the Host IP address
In order to determine your host PC’s IP address proceed as follows:
1 On the status bar, click Start and select Run to open an input
window.
2 On the input line, type cmd to open a command prompt.
3 Type IPconfig -all to display the network settings for the PC. In
this list you will find its IP address. To close the command prompt
type exit.
104
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7
SCPI Command Reference
7
This chapter provides a reference list of commands for remote control
of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer. Topics discussed in this
chapter are as follows:
– “Overview” on page 106
– “General commands” on page 106
– “System commands” on page 112
– “Sense commands” on page 119
– “Input commands” on page 133
– “MMemory commands” on page 135
– “Instrument commands” on page 147
– “Display commands” on page 148
– “Calculate commands” on page 151
– “Format commands” on page 158
– “Service commands” on page 159
– “SCPI errors” on page 163
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
105
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Overview
Overview
The command set of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer follows the
SCPI standard and is broken down into the following subsystems:
– General commands
– System commands
– Sense commands
– Input commands
– Memory commands
– Display commands
– Calculate commands
– Format commands
Each keyword in the command can be used either in its long or its short
form. Uppercase letters are used to indicate the short-form command
syntax. Within one keyword, either the short form or the full version can
be used, but not a mix.
The syntax can be used to form either a command or a query (with a
question mark behind the command form). Many SCPI commands have
either a command form or a query form, but not both.
Please refer to the “Index of SCPI Commands” on page 351 for an
alphabetical list of commands.
General commands
:REBoot
Syntax
:REBoot
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Reboots the 9101. The current settings are not affected by this command.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:REBoot
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
106
Syntax
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Starts a printout over the serial port. For further informations see command
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:HCOPy
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
General commands
*CAL
Syntax
*CAL?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
The command form is not available.
Query
Returns the date of the last calibration by Aeroflex in the format yyyy,
mm,dd.
Example
*CAL?
Returns 2004,04,01.
*OPT
Syntax
*OPT?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Description
The command form is not available.
Query
Example
*OPT?
*CLS
Syntax
*CLS
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Resets the entire status reporting system:
– The service register will be cleared (all bits will be set to 0).
– The event status register will be cleared (all bits will be set to 0).
– The error message queue will be emptied.
– All event-type registers will be cleared.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
*IDN
Syntax
*IDN?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns a string, containing the following information:
– manufacturer's name
– name of the device
– serial number
– software revision number
All parameters are separated by commas.
Note: In times of company mergers and acquisitions, it is a good idea to
check the name of the device, not the manufacturer's name which may
change between software updates. This does not preclude any name
changes at Aeroflex but rather applies to instrumentation in general.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
107
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
General commands
Example
*IDN?
returns: "AEROFLEX, 9101, 0104012, 1.00"
*RST
Syntax
*RST
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Resets the entire test set. All parameters, limits etc. will be set to the internally predefined default values.
Query
There is no query form available.
*WAI
Syntax
*WAI
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Description
Postpones the execution of a command until all commands issued previously have been completed
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
*OPC
Syntax
*OPC?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Only the query form is available.
Query
Waits until the previous command is completed. In addition, the query
returns the Operation Complete flag which is 1 in the successful case.
Commands affecting the
event status register
108
The event status register contains eight bits. The meaning of these bits
is outlined in the table below.
The commands working on the event status register are described
below the table.
Bit
Decim
al
Meaning
7
128
Power on – this bit is always set.
6
64
User Request – a 1 on this position indicates
that the 9101 is no longer controlled by
remote commands but by user interaction.
5
32
Command error – this bit indicates that a SCPI
command error occurred (SCPI error codes
100 to 199).
4
16
Execution error – is set after a SCPI execution
error did occur (SCPI error codes 200 to 299).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
General commands
3
8
Device-dependent error – this bit indicates
that a device-specific SCPI error did occur
(SCPI error codes 300 to 399).
2
4
Query error – is set after a SCPI query error
occurred (SCPI error codes 400 to 499).
1
2
Request control – this bit is reserved for future
use.
0
1
Operation complete flag – is set as soon as
the execution of a command has been completed.
*ESE
Syntax
*ESE <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer.
The valid range is from 0 to 255 (8 bits).
Command
Sets the enable filter (mask) of the event status register.
int1 is the decimal representation of the binary mask.
The mask and the current contents of the event status register will be
ANDed. If the result is not zero, then bit 5 of the Service register will be set.
Query
The query form reads out the enable filter (mask) currently set and returns
its binary representation in a string.
Example
*ESE 128
As soon as power has been switched on, bit 7 (Power on) will be set.
ANDed with the mask 128, a binary 1 will occur and thus bit 5 of the service register will be set.
*ESR
Syntax
*ESR?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the decimal representation of the current contents of the event status register in a string.
Note: This register is self-destructive, i.e. its contents will be cleared after
reading.
Example
After power-on, the *ESR? query will return "128". This means that bit 7 is
set and all the other bits of the event status register are 0.
The command will clear the event status register and a subsequent *ESR?
query will return "0".
Commands affecting the
service register
The service register represents the highest level within the report structure of the 9101.
The service register contains eight bits.
If any of the bits 0 to 5 or 7 is set, the summary status bit (bit 6) of the
service register will be set as well.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
109
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
General commands
NOTE
The service register is self-destructive. This means that its contents
will be cleared after reading.
Bit
Decim
al
7
128
OPERational status summary. When this bit is
set, an event within the general operation register group (e.g. the 9101 is waiting for a trigger) passed all filters.
6
64
Summary status bit. This bit will always be set
as soon as any other bit of the service register
has been set.
5
32
Event status summary. When this bit is set, an
event within the event status register group
(e.g. an error occurred) passed all filters.
4
16
Message available. This bit will be set to 1 as
soon as a query has been completed and
measurement results are available.
3
8
QUESTionable status summary. If this bit is set,
an event within the general questionable status register group (e.g. 'value out of range')
passed all filters.
2
4
Error queue status. When this bit is set, the
error queue contains error messages. Up to
10 error messages can be logged in the error
queue. The error queue can be read out,
using the :SYSTem:ERRor? query.
1
2
Remote command completed. This bit will be
set to 1 after a remote (SCPI) command has
been completed.
Note: When the 9101 receives a SCPI command, it will block any further input readings
until the command has been completed.
Meaning
*SRE
110
Syntax
*SRE <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer.
The valid range is from 0 to 255 (8 bits).
Command
Sets the enable filter (mask) for the service register.
int1 is the decimal representation of this binary mask.
The mask and the current contents of the service register will be ANDed.
Query
The query form reads out the mask currently set and returns its binary representation in a string.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
General commands
Example
*SRE 68
As soon as an error occurs, bits 2 and 6 of the service register will be set.
ANDed with the mask (68), a binary 1 will be the result.
*STB
Syntax
*STB?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the decimal representation of the current contents of the service
register in a string.
Note: This register is self-destructive, i.e. its contents will be cleared after
reading.
Example
A *STB? command returns "68".
The return value of 68 (= 64 + 4) means that an error occurred (4).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
111
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
System commands
With the system commands, the internal settings of the 9101 Handheld
Spectrum Analyzer can be changed.
:SYSTem:DATE
Syntax
:SYSTem:DATE <int1>,<int2>,<int3>
Parameters
intx are three integers.
The minimum value for int1 is 1998, the maximum is 2100. The default
value is 1998.
The minimum value for int2 is 1, the maximum is 12. The default value is
1.
The minimum value for int3 is 1, the maximum is 31. The default value is
1.
Command
Sets the system date. This command uses the following format:
yyyy,mm,dd where
yyyy stands for the four digits of the year (int1),
mm gives the current month (int2),
dd represents the day of the current month (int3).
Query
Reads and returns the current system date in a string, using the format
explained above.
Example
:SYST:DATE 2001,7,6
Sets the system date to the July 6, 2001.
:SYSTem:TIME
112
Syntax
:SYSTem:TIME <int1>,<int2>,<int3>
Parameters
intx are three integers.
The minimum value for int1 is 0, the maximum is 23. The default value is
0.
The minimum value for int2 is 0, the maximum is 59. The default value is
0.
The minimum value for int3 is 0, the maximum is 59. The default value is
0.
Command
Sets the system time. This command uses the following format: hh,mm,ss
where
hh stands for the two digits of the current hour, using a 24 hour time format
(int1),
mm gives the current minute (int2) and,
ss represents the seconds of the system time (int3).
Query
Reads and returns the current system time in a string, using the format
explained above.
Example
:SYST:TIME?
String returned in this example: "14,56,05" meaning roughly four minutes to 3 pm.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LOCal
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LOCal
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Sets up the 9101 to allow manual operation on the front panel during SCPI
operation.
Notes:
– This command may be used e.g. to allow interactive alignment procedures in a
production flow.
– The instrument can also be set to local mode by pressing the Escape function key
on the front panel.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:SYSTem:COMM:LOC
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ECHO
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ECHo <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
This command determines how the Aeroflex 9101 acts after executing a
SCPI command.
If echo is set to ON, there will be a response. Either "ok", if the execution
was successful or "ERR" if an error occured. The echo-on mode is preferred for entering interactive commands.
If echo is set to OFF, there will be no response to a SCPI command. In this
case it is possible to check with the *OPC? query, when the SCPI command
is finished and the Aeroflex 9101 is ready to receive the next command.
Query
Reads and returns the current echo setting.
Example
:SYST:COMM:ECH ON
Returns the following string: "ok"
All subsequent commands returns "ok" or "ERR".
:SYST:COMM:ECH?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:SYST:COMM:ECH OFF
Returns nothing, all subsequent commands return nothing.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet?
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns ON, if the Aeroflex 9101 is connected to a local area network (LAN)
via TCP/IP connector, otherwise returns OFF.
Example
:SYSTem:COMM:ETH?
String returned in this example: "OFF"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
113
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:IPADdress
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:IPADdress
<int1>,<int2>,<int3>,<int4>
Parameters
intx are four integers.
The minimum value for all integers is 0, the maximum is 255. The default
value is 0.
Command
This command sets the IP address of the Aeroflex 9101 to the parameter
values.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting of the IP address as explained above.
Example
SYST:COMM:ETH:IPAD 192,16,16,114 sets the IP address to a defined
value.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TNAMe
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TNAMe <string>
Parameters
string is a string only containing the device name of the Aeroflex 9101.
Command
This command sets the device name of the Aeroflex 9101. It can be used
to announce a symbolic device name for the 9101, if the network supports
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting of the device name as explained
above.
Example
SYST:COMM:ETHernet:TNAMe "TARGET9104" sets the device name to
a defined value.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:SUBNetmask
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:SUBNetmask
<int1>,<int2>,<int3>,<int4>
Parameters
intx are four integers.
The minimum value for all integers is 0, the maximum is 255. The default
value is 0.
Command
This command sets the subnet mask of the Aeroflex 9101 to the parameter
values. Setting a subnet mask may speed up the traffic on the Ethernet.
Note: This command is supported from software version 2.00 on.
Query
Returns the current setting of the subnet mask as explained above.
Example
SYST:COMM:ETH:SUBN 255,255,255,255 sets the subnet mask to a
defined value.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:PORT
114
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:PORT <int>
Parameters
int defines the TCP/IP port address of the Aeroflex 9101. The address
must be in the range from 1024 to 65535. Default value is 49200.
Command
This command sets the port address on which the Aeroflex 9101 can be
controlled via LAN to a new value.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
Query
Reads and returns the current setting of the port used by TCPIP as
explained above.
Example
SYST:COMM:ETHernet:PORT 49200 sets the TCP/IP port address to its
default.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TERMinator
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TERMinator <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
CRLF|LF|CR.
Default is CRLF.
Command
Sets the terminator characters, which are appended to every SCPI respond
from the Aeroflex 9101 LAN interface.
Query
Reads and returns the current terminator setting for the LAN interface.
Example
:SYST:COMM:ETH:TERM CR
:SYST:COMM:ETH:TERM?
Returns the following string: "CR"
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:BAUDrate
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:BAUDrate <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer.
The minimum value for int1 is 300, the maximum value is 57600. The
default value for int1 is 57600. Valid values are
300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400 and 57600.
Command
Sets the data rate for the serial port. Only the data rate can be changed; all
other parameters are fixed. The number of bits per character is set to 8, the
number of stop bits is set to 1 and parity is set to NO.
Query
Reads and returns the serial interface data rate currently set.
Example
:SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 9600
:SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD?
String returned in this example: "9600".
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:TERMinator
Syntax
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:TERMinator <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
CRLF|LF|CR.
Default is CRLF.
Command
Sets the terminator characters, which are appended to every SCPI
response from the Aeroflex 9101 serial interface.
Query
Reads and returns the current terminator setting for the serial interface.
Example
:SYST:COMM:SER:TERM LF
:SYST:COMM:SER:TERM?
Returns the following string: "LF"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
115
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Syntax
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the oldest unread error message from the internal error queue of
the Aeroflex 9101. The queue entry returned will be a string (text). The
maximum length of the text is 255 characters.
Note: A list of error messages can be found in section “SCPI errors” on
page 163.
Example
*RESET
:SYSTem:ERRor:NEXT?
String returned in this example: -113,"Undefined header"
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
Syntax
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the number of unread error messages in the internal error queue
of the Aeroflex 9101. The string returned will contain one integer. The maximum number of errors stored internally is 10.
Example
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
String returned in this example: "0"
This means that there are no unread error messages in the error queue.
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
Syntax
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the code of the oldest unread error message in the internal error
queue of the Aeroflex 9101. The string returned will contain one integer
(and no text).
Note: A list of error messages can be found in section “SCPI errors” on
page 163.
Example
*RESET
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE?
String returned in this example: "-113"
This means that an undefined header (*RESET) was received.
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
116
Syntax
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
Query
Returns the error codes of all unread error messages in the internal error
queue of the Aeroflex 9101. The string returned will contain a maximum of
100 integers, separated by commas.
Note: A list of error messages can be found in section “SCPI errors” on
page 163.
Example
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
String returned in this example: "-113,-112,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
This means that there were two unread error messages in the error queue.
:SYSTem:DNAMe
Syntax
:SYSTem:DNAMe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Sets a user-definable device name for the 9101 to use this unique name on
protocols.
Query
Reads and returns the device name set on this 9101.
Example
:SYSTem:DNAMe "Develop5"
:SYST:DNAM?
String returned in this example: "Develop5"
:SYSTem:OPTions
Syntax
:SYSTem:OPTions <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
25 characters.
Command
Enables or disables a software option on the Aeroflex 9101 with the appropriate option key string1.
Query
There is no query form available.
Example
:SYSTem:OPTions "00172663845433"
Enables the option corresponding to the key.
:SYSTem:SCReendump:COLor?
Syntax
:SYSTem:SCReendump:COLor? <int1>
Parameters
int1 is a integer in the range of 0 to 255.
Command
There is only the query form available.
Query
Returns the RGB color value (in hexadecimal) of the given color palette
entry. Max. 256 palette entries are available.
Example
:SYST:SCR:COL? 5
String returned in this example:
"a800a8"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
117
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
System commands
:SYSTem:SCReendump:LINe?
Syntax
:SYSTem:SCReendump:LINe? <int1>
Parameters
int1 is a integer in the range of 0 to 479.
Command
There is only the query form available.
Query
Returns one pixel line (of 480) of the screen as pairs of hexadecimal values.
Example
:SYST:SCR:LIN? 345
String returned in this example:
"0201420fff00f600010f0201080b1e0f1e0b"
:SYSTem:SCReendump:REMote
Syntax
:SYSTem:SCReendump:REMote <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
This command removes the Remote display when it is set to OFF. This is
useful for screen dumps.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SYST:SCR:REM OFF
:SYST:SCR:REM?
Returns the following string: "OFF"
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe
Syntax
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|PCL.
Default is OFF.
Command
This command set the printer type for a hardcopy of the display. At the
moment, only PCL capable printer like HP Laserjet are supported. The
printer has to be connected to the serial port (normaly with a RS232/Centronics converter), therefore remote control of printer output is only possible via TCP/IP. The serial interface has to be set to the maximum possible
baudrate of the printer/converter with command SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:BAUDrate. The output to the printer is started with command
HCOPy[:IMMediate].
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe PCL
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe?
Returns the following string: "PCL"
:SYSTem:PRINter:BAUDrate
118
Syntax
:SYSTem:PRINter:BAUDrate <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer.
The minimum value for int1 is 300, the maximum value is 57600. The
default value for int1 is 19200. Valid values are
300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400 and 57600.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Command
Sets the data rate for the serial port if a printer is connected. The print output can be started with HCOPy. Only the data rate can be changed; all other
parameters are fixed. The number of bits per character is set to 8, the number of stop bits is set to 1 and parity is set to NO.
Query
Reads and returns the serial interface data rate currently set.
Example
:SYST:PRINter:BAUD 9600
:SYST:PRINter:BAUD?
String returned in this example:
9600.
Sense commands
These commands affect the spectrum analyzer settings, start measurements and return results.
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution
Syntax
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 100, the maximum value 1000000.
real1 can be set as 110n or 310n. The default value for real1 is
1000000.
Command
This command sets the resolution bandwidth of the 9101, in Hertz.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution 300000
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution?
The value returned in this example is: "300000".
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTo
Syntax
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTo <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
Switches the automatic selection of the bandwidth resolution on or off. If
switched on, the 9101 selects the resolution bandwidth depending on the
current span, video bandwidth, and sweep time.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTo ON
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTo?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo
Syntax
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo <real1>
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
119
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 10, the maximum value 1000000.
Possible values are:
10,100,300,1000,3000,10000,30000,100000,300000,1000000.
The default value for real1 is 1000000.
Command
Sets the video bandwidth of the 9101. The unit of real1 is Hertz.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo 300000
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo?
The value returned in this example is: "300000".
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTo
Syntax
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTo <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF|.
Default is ON.
Command
Switches the automatic selection of the video bandwidth on or off. If
switched on, the 9101 selects the video bandwidth depending on the current span, resolution bandwidth, and sweep time.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTo OFF
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTo?
Returns the following string: "OFF"
:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 5000, the maximum value 7500000000.
real1 can be set in multiples of 1000. The default value for real1 is
1800000000.
Command
Sets the center frequency of the 9101, in Hertz. When a new center frequency is selected, this affects the start and stop frequencies, leaving the
span unchanged so long as the new start and stop frequencies do not
exceed the limits of the 9101.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1500000000
:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
The value returned in this example is: "1500000000".
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN
120
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0, the maximum value 7500000000. The
minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1000. The default value for
real1 is 3600000000.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Command
Sets the frequency span, i.e. the measured bandwidth, in Hertz. A new frequency span setting will leave the center frequency unchanged but affect
start and stop frequencies; only if the new start or stop frequency exceeds
a limit of the 9101, the center frequency will be changed accordingly.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 1500000000
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN?
The value returned in this example is: "1500000000".
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Sets the 9101 to the maximum supported frequency span. This command
affects start, stop and corresponding center frequency.
Note: If you set the span to 0, the 9101 will perform measurements in the
time rather than the frequency domain.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:SENS:FREQ:SPAN:FULL
Sets the start frequency of the 9101 to 0 and the stop frequency to 4 GHz.
:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0, the maximum value 7500000000. The
minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1000. The default value for
real1 is 0.
Command
Sets the start frequency of the 9101, in Hertz. This command leaves the
span as is but affects the center frequency and the stop frequency.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1500000000
:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt?
The value returned in this example is: "1500000000".
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 10000, the maximum value 7500000000.
The minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1000. The default value for
real1 is 3600000000.
Command
Sets the stop frequency of the measured bandwidth, in Hertz. This command leaves the span unchanged but affects the center frequency and the
start frequency.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
121
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 2500000000
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP?
The value returned in this example is: "2500000000".
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP:MAX
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:MAX?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only the query form available.
Query
Returns the maximum stop frequency supported by the instrument at hand.
Example
:SENS:FREQ:STOP:MAX?
:SENSe:FREQuency:MODE
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:MODE <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
CSPan|SSTop|SSPAN. Default is CSPan.
Command
Defines which frequency mode is active.
Three modes are available: Center-Span, Start-Stop, Start-Span.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:MODe CSPan
:SENSe:FREQuency:MODe?
Returns the following string: "CSPan"
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real1 is 0,
the maximum value 1000000000. The minimum resolution possible for
real1 is 1000. The default value for real1 is 360000000.
Command
Sets the step size for the center frequency setting using the cursor keys in
manual mode.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep 2.5E6
:SENSe:FREQuency:FST?
Value returned in this example: 2500000
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep:AUTo
122
Syntax
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep:AUTo <PredefExp>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
Enables or disables the automatic selection of the step size for the center
frequency setting using the cursor keys in manual mode.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Example
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep:AUTo ON
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep:AUTo?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:SENSe:CPOWer:SPAN
Syntax
:SENSe:CPOWer:SPAN <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: FULL|SINGle.
Default is FULL.
Command
Sets the channel power display mode of the 9101.
FULL selects the whole system spectrum. SINGle displays the spectrum of
the selected channel.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CPOWer:SPAN SINGle
:SENSe:CPOWer:SPAN?
Returns the following string: "SINGle"
:SENSe:CPOWer:CHANnel
Syntax
:SENSe:CPOWer:CHANnel <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for int1 is 0, the maximum is
1000000. The default value is 0.
Command
Sets the actual channel number which is displayed in SINGle and FULL
mode.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:CPOWer:CHANnel 50
:SENSe:CPOWer:CHANnel?
The value returned in this example is: "50".
:SENSe:CPOWer:OBW
Syntax
:SENSe:CPOWer:OBW <int1>
Parameters
int1 is a integer. The minimum value for int1 is 5, the maximum is 99.
The default value for int1 is 90.
Command
Sets the percentage value for which the 9101 shall determine the occupied
bandwidth (channnel power mode).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:CPOWer:OBW 20
:SENSe:CPOWer:OBW?
The value returned in this example is: "20"
:SENSe:CPOWer:MEASure
Syntax
:SENSe:CPOWer:MEASure <PredefExp>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
CPOWer|ACPR|OBW. Default is CPOWer.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
123
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Command
Starts measurements of the type described by PredefExpr.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:CPOWer:MEASure ACPR
:SENSe:CPOWer:MEASure?
Returns the following string: "ACPR".
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME
Syntax
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.0, the maximum value 250.0. The minimum resolution possible for real1 is 0.0001. The default value for
real1 is 0.0432.
Command
Sets the sweep time, i.e. the measurement time to cover the full frequency
span. real1 is the time in seconds.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME 0.3
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME?
The value returned in this example is: "0.3".
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO
Syntax
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
Switches the automatic selection of the sweep time on or off. If turned on,
the 9101 will decide on the best sweep time depending on the current settings of span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?
Returns the following string: "ON".
:SENSe:SWEep:STATe
124
Syntax
:SENSe:SWEep:STATe <PredefExpr>[,<int1>]
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
CONTinuous|SINGle|HOLD. Default is CONTinuous.
int1 is an optional integer. It is only valid for SINGle sweeps. The minimum value for int1 is 1, the maximum is 999. The default value is 1.
Command
Sets the measurement display mode of the 9101.
CONTinuous selects repetitive measurements.
SINGle lets the 9101 perform and display one (or a limited number of)
measurement(s). The optional second parameter indicates how often a
sweep will be performed.
HOLD immediately stops any ongoing measurement.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Example
:SENSe:SWEep:STATe SINGle
:SENSe:SWEep:STATe?
Returns the following string: "SINGle".
:SENSe:TRIGger
Syntax
:SENSe:TRIGger <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|VIDeo.
Default is OFF.
Command
Sets the trigger mode of the 9101.
OFF means no trigger is active. VIDeo activates the trigger at choosen
level.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
SENSe:TRIGger VIDeo
:SENSe:TRIGger?
Returns the following string: "VIDeo".
:SENSe:TRIGger:LEVel
Syntax
:SENSe:TRIGger:LEVel <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is -100, the maximum value 30.0. The minimum resolution possible for real1 is 0.1. The default value is -40.
Command
Sets the trigger level which is active, if SENSe:TRIGger is set to VIDeo.
real1 is the level in dBm.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:TRIGger:LEVel -10
:SENSe:TRIGger:LEVel?
The value returned in this example is: "-10".
:SENSe:TRIGger:EDGE
Syntax
:SENSe:TRIGger:EDGE <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
POSitive|NEGative. Default is POSitive.
Command
Sets either the positive or the negative slope for the trigger.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
SENSe:TRIGger:EDGe NEGative
:SENSe:TRIGger?
Returns the following string: "NEGative".
:SENSe:DEMod[:MODulation]
Syntax
:SENSe:DEMod[:MODulation] <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|AM|FM.
Default is OFF.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
125
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Command
Sets the demodulation mode, which can be off, AM (amplitude modulation)
or FM (frequency modulation). FM demodulation is performed in a 30 kHz
bandwidth.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:DEMod FM
:SENSe:DEMod:MODulation?
Returns the following string: "FM"
:SENSe:DEMod:DEMod
Syntax
:SENSe:DEMod:DEMod <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
PERManent|ATMarker.
Default is PERManent.
Command
Sets the demodulation permanent to center frequency or at marker.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:DEMod:DEMod PERManent
:SENSe:DEMod:DEMod?
Returns the following string: "PERManent"
:SENSe:DEMod:VOLume
Syntax
:SENSe:DEMod:VOLume <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for int1 is 0, the maximum is 100.
The default value for int1 is 50.
Command
Sets the volume of the demodulated signal in percent.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:DEMod:VOLume 20
:SENSe:DEMod:VOLume?
The value returned in this example is: "20".
:SENSe:DEMod:DURation
126
Syntax
:SENSe:DEMod:DURation <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real1 is 0,
the maximum value 10. The minimum resolution is 0.001. The default
value is 2.
Command
Sets the duration of the demodulated signal in seconds.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:DEMod:DURation 10
:SENSe:DEMod:DURation?
The value returned in this example is: "10".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion
Syntax
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
POSNeg|SAMPle|POSitive|NEGative|.
Default is POSNeg.
Command
Defines which measurement values shall be displayed.
The 9101 takes far more measurements than can be displayed on the
screen, so several results are summarized into one.
POSNeg indicates both the maximum and minimum values for each frequency point in the form of a straight vertical line between these values.
SAMPle lets the 9101 randomly select one of the measurement values for
each frequency point.
POSitive lets the 9101 pick the highest value.
NEGative lets the 9101 select the lowest value.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion SAMPle
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion?
Returns the following string: "SAMPle".
:SENSe:TRACe:A[:STATe]
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:A[:STATe] <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
ACTual|MAXHold|MINHold|HOLD|AVG|OFF. Default is ACTual.
Command
Sets the display mode for Trace A.
ACTual shows measurement by measurement.
MAXHold displays the maximum value for each frequency point over all the
measurements.
MINHold shows the minimum value for each frequency point over all the
measurements.
HOLD stops the measurement immediately.
AVG displays, for each frequency point, an average value over all the measurements.
OFF switches the trace off.
Query
Reads and returns the current settings.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:A MAXHold
:SENSe:TRACe:A:STATe?
Returns the following string: "MAXHold".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
127
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
:SENSe:TRACe:A:FETCh?
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:A:FETCh? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
ALL|MINimum|MAXimum|FREQuency|FMINimum|FMAXimum.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the data of trace A depending on the parameter:
Param ALL returns: <min>,<max>,<freq>,<min>,<max>,<freq>, ... .
Param MIN returns: <min>,<min>, ... .
Param MAX returns: <max>,<max>, ... .
Param FREQ returns: <freq>,<freq>, ... .
Param FMIN returns: <min>,<freq>,<min>,<freq>, ... .
Param FMAX returns: <max>,<freq>,<max>,<freq>, ... .
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:A:FETCh? ALL
Returns the following string:
"1000000.0,-50.3,-45.5,1001000.0,-53.4,-48.2,...".
:SENSe:TRACe:B[:STATe]
128
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:B[:STATe] <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
ACTual|MAXHold|MINHold|HOLD|AVG|OFF.
Default is OFF.
Command
Sets the display mode for Trace B.
ACTual shows measurement by measurement.
MAXHold displays the maximum value for each frequency point over all the
measurements.
MINHold shows the minimum value for each frequency point over all the
measurements.
HOLD stops the measurement immediately.
AVG displays, for each frequency point, an average value over all the measurements.
OFF switches Trace B off.
Query
Reads and returns the current settings.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:B MAXHold
:SENSe:TRACe:B?
Returns the following string: "MAXHold".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
:SENSe:TRACe:B:FETCh?
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:B:FETCh? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
ALL|MINimum|MAXimum|FREQuency|FMINimum|FMAXimum.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the data of trace B depending on the parameter:
Param ALL returns: <min>,<max>,<freq>,<min>,<max>,<freq>, ... .
Param MIN returns: <min>,<min>, ... .
Param MAX returns: <max>,<max>, ... .
Param FREQ returns: <freq>,<freq>, ... .
Param FMIN returns: <min>,<freq>,<min>,<freq>, ... .
Param FMAX returns: <max>,<freq>,<max>,<freq>, ... .
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:B:FETCh? ALL
Returns the following string:
"1000000.0,-50.3,-45.5,1001000.0,-53.4,-48.2,..."
:SENSe:TRACe:AVGFactor
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:AVGFactor <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for int1 is 1, the maximum is 125.
The default value for int1 is 5.
Command
Sets the trace averaging factor.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:AVGFactor 10
:SENSe:TRACe:AVGFactor?
Value returned in this example: "10".
:SENSe:TRACe:CLEar
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:CLEar
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Clears the current trace.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:CLEar
:SENSe:TRACe:COPY
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:COPY <PredefExpr>[,<int>]
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ATOB|BTOA.
Command
Copies trace A to B or vice versa.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:COPY ATOB
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
129
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa?
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa? <PredefExpr>[,<int>]
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: A|B which
returns Trace A or Trace B.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
First return string: "ALL" or "MINM". "ALL" returns, if minimum and maximum values are identical, e.g. "Max hold" or "Min hold". 501 values
returned, no redundant data is sent. "MINM" returns, if minimum and maximum Values are NOT identical, e.g. "ACTUAL" or "Average". 1002 Values
returned, the first 501 values are the minimum values and after them follow
the maximum values. Second return string: the trace data. Every level value
is represented by 3 bytes. The following formula is used to calculate the
level value in dBm: Level = Hexvalue / 10 - 200.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa? A
The values returned in this example are:
"ALL","38D36F37238B38D3A63A73BC4103A63E33A13CB..."
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa:LIMit
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa:LIMit?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the Pass/Fail criteria for the recently received trace with
SENSe:TRACe:DATa?. There will be returned one of the predefined
expressions: PASS|FAIL
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa:LIMit?
Returns the following string: "PASS"
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the normalized criteria for the current trace. There will
be returned one of the predefined expressions: NA|UNNormalized|NORMalized
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH?
Returns the following string: "NORM"
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:[A|B]
130
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:[A|B] <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|SUBtract|NORMalize.
Default is OFF.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Command
Switches math. function for traces A and B off or to Subtraction or to Normalize.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:A SUB
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:A?
Returns the following string: "SUB"
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:OFFSet
Syntax
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:OFFSet <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
Command
This command sets the trace offset for the subtracted trace (A-B->A trace).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:OFFSet -20
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:OFFSet?
The value returned in this example is: "-20".
:SENSe:REFLevel
Syntax
:SENSe:REFLevel <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum and maximum value for real1 depend on the unit set by
SENS:REFLevel:UNIT. When the unit is set to dBm, the minimum value is
-100, the maximum value is 30. When the unit is set to dBuV, the minimum
value is 7, the maximum value is 137. When the unit is set to dBmV, the minimum value is -53, the maximum value is 77. When the unit is set to dBV,
the minimum value is -113, the maximum value is 17. The default value for
real1 is 0 dBm.
Command
This command sets the reference level of the 9101 (0 dB line), in the unit
selected with the :SENS:REFLevel:UNIT command.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:REFLevel -50
:SENSe:REFLevel?
The value returned in this example is: "-50".
:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT
Syntax
:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
DBM|DBUV|DBMV|DBV|V|MV|UV|MW|UW|.
Default is DBM.
Command
Defines the unit for the reference level to logarithmic units (dBm, dBμV,
dBmV or dBV) or linear units (V, mV, μV, mW, μW). It also affects the unit in
which results (on the vertical axis) are displayed.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
131
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Sense commands
Example
:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT DBMV
:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT?
Returns the following string: "DBMV"
:SENSe:REFLevel:OFFSet
Syntax
:SENSe:REFLevel:OFFSet <PredefExpr>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is -113.0, the maximum value 9999999.9.
real1 can be set in multiples of 1000. The default value for real1 is
5000000.
Command
Defines the reference level offset.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:REFLevel:OFFset -10
:SENSe:REFLevel:OFFSet?
Returns the following string: "-10"
:SENSe:STATe
Syntax
:SENSe:STATe?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the Uncal state.
Example
:SENSe:STATe?
Returns the following string: "ON".
:SENSe:MEASure
Syntax
:SENSe:MEASure <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
NONe|CPOWer|ACPR|OBW. Default is NONe.
Command
Starts measurements of the type described by PredefExp.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:MEASure ACPR
:SENSe:MEASure?
Returns the following string: "ACPR"
:SENSe:MEASure:OBW
132
Syntax
:SENSe:MEASure:OBW <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for int1 is 5, the maximum is 99.
The default value for int1 is 90.
Command
Sets the percentage value for which the 9101 shall determine the occupied
bandwidth (spectrum analyzer mode).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Input commands
Example
:SENSe:MEASure:OBW 20
:SENSe:MEASure:OBW?
The value returned in this example is: "20".
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:WIDTh
Syntax
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:WIDTh <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real1 is
100000, the maximum value 2000000000. real1 can be set in multiples
of 1000. The default value for real1 is 5000000.
Command
Sets the actual channel width in spectrum analyzer mode.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:WIDTh 150000000
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:WIDTh?
The value returned in this example is: "150000000".
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:SPACing
Syntax
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:SPACing <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 100000, the maximum value
2000000000. real1 can be set in multiples of 1000. The default value for
real1 is 10000000.
Command
Sets the actual channel spacing in spectrum analyzer mode.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:SPACing 1500000000
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:SPACing?
The value returned in this example is: "1500000000".
:SENSe:MEASure:ADJSettings
Syntax
:SENSe:MEASure:ADJSettings
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Adjusts settings in display made with ...CHAN:WIDTh and ...SPACing in the
corresponding measure mode CPOWer, ACPR or OBW.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:SENSe:MEASure:ADJSettings
Input commands
With these commands, the input stage of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum
Analyzer is affected.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
133
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Input commands
WARNING
The maximum input power level at the RF IN connector is 30 dBm
(1 W). Higher input levels may result in serious damage of the instrument.
:INPut:ATTenuation
Syntax
:INPut:ATTenuation <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0, the maximum value 50. real1 can be
set in steps of 10. The default value for real1 is 30.
Command
This command sets the RF preattenuation of the Aeroflex 9101. The physical dimension of real1 is dB.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INP:ATT 20
:INPut:ATTenuation?
The value returned is in this example: "20".
:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTo
Syntax
:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTo <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
Lets the 9101 select the preattenuation depending on the reference level.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INP:ATT:AUTO ON
:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:INPut:IMPedance
Syntax
:INPut:IMPedance <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
IMP50|IMP75.
Default is IMP50.
Command
Lets the 9101 select between 50  and 75  impedance.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INP:IMP IMP75
:INPut:IMPedance?
Returns the following string: "IMP75"
:INPut:EDEVice
134
Syntax
:INPut:EDEVice <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is OFF.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Command
Switches the external device compensation on or off. A corresponding file
has to be loaded first with command MMEMory:LOAD:EDEVice.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INP:EDEVice ON
:INPut:EDEVice?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:INPut:AFACtor
Syntax
:INPut:AFACtor <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|ON.
Default is OFF.
Command
Switches the antenna factor compensation on or off. A corresponding file
has to be loaded first with command MMEMory:LOAD:AFACtor.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INPut:AFACtor ON
:INPut:AFACtor?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:INPut:CFACtor
Syntax
:INPut:CFACtor <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: OFF|ON.
Default is OFF.
Command
Switches the cable factor compensation on or off. A corresponding file has
to be loaded first with command MMEMory:LOAD:CFACtor.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:INPut:CFACtor ON
:INPut:CFACtor?
Returns the following string: "ON"
MMemory commands
With the MMemory commands, you can fully exploit the capabilities of
the instrument to store and reload measurement results in its nonvolatile memory.
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Stores the actual parameter settings of the 9101 in the SETTINGS directory
on the flash disk in a file named <string1>.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last stored with this command.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
135
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe "sett3"
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <string1>[,<PredefExp>]
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: A|B. Default is A.
Command
Stores the current trace A or B and the parameter settings on the flash disk
in the TRACE directory in a file named <string1>.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last stored with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe "GSM900",A
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit
136
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit
<string1>{,<PredefExpr>,<x1>,<y1>,<x2>,<y2>...}
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit? <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
MINimium|MAXimum.
x1 y1 x2 y2 are floating point real numbers.
The minimum value for all these reals is 0, the maximum value for the x values is 10, the maximum value for the y values is 8, the resolution for all real
values is 0.1 and the default is 0.
Command
Stores the limits defined as lines in the LIMIT directory on the flash disk in a
file named <string1>. A line is defined by a parameter set
PredefExpr,x1,y1,x2,y2. Up to 30 parameter sets can follow the
string parameter.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the limit file which is given as
parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit
"lim2",UPP,2.3,4.5,6.9,7,2,LOW,2.3,1.5,6.9,3,2
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit? "lim2"
String returned: UPP,2.3,4.5,6.9,7,2,LOW,2.3,1.5,6.9,3,2
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel <string1>, <int1>, <int2>,
<real1>, <real2>, <real3>, <real4>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for int1 is 1, the maximum is
1000000. The default value is 100.
int2 is an integer. The minimum value for int2 is 0, the maximum is
1000000. The default value is 0.
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real1 is 0,
the maximum value 7500000000. The minimum resolution is 1000. The
default value is 1000000.
real2 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real2 is 0,
the maximum value 7500000000. The minimum resolution is 1000. The
default value is 1000000.
real3 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real3 is 0,
the maximum value 7500000000. The minimum resolution is 1000. The
default value is 1000000000.
real4 is a floating point real number. The minimum value for real4 is 100, the maximum value 30. The minimum resolution is 1. The default
value is 0.
Command
This command stores the present communication system settings within
the 9101 (e.g. for the channel power mode).
string1 is the name of system settings file in which the parameters are
stored. int1 sets the number of channels. int2 sets the start channel
number. real1 sets the channel bandwidth over which to measure, in
Hertz. real2 sets the frequency spacing of the channels, in Hertz. real3
sets the frequency of the first channel, in Hertz. real4 sets the system reference level (0 dB line).
Query
Reads and returns the parameter set from the limit file given as a parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel "PGSM9DO",125,0,400000,200000,935000000,0.0
:MMEMory:STORe:EDEVice
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:EDEVice <string1>, <real1freq>,
<real1lev>, <real2freq>, <real2lev>, ... <real100freq>,
<real100lev>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
real1freq to real100freq are floating point real numbers. The minimum value is 0, the maximum value 4e9. The minimum resolution is 1.
real1lev to real100lev are floating point real numbers. The minimum
value is -100, the maximum value 30. The minimum resolution is 0.01.
Command
This command stores settings for external device compensation. string1
is the name of the external device compensation file in which the parameters are stored. realxfreq and realxlev are pairs of frequency and
level values to set the attenuation on the respective frequency. The instrument applies linear interpolation for the level between frequency points.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the external device compensation
file which is given as a parameter.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
137
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:EDEVice "EXT_DEV2",1000000, -5.1,
2000000,-3.2,5000000,-4.1,10000000,-3.8,20000000,-2.6
:MMEM:STOR:EDEV? "EXT_DEV2"
String returned: 1000000, -5.1,2000000,-3.2,5000000,-4.1,
10000000,-3.8,20000000,-2.6
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe <string1>,<real1>,<real2>,
<PredefExpr>,<real3>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value is 1.0, the maximum value 20.0. The minimum resolution is 0.1. The default value is 1.0.
real2 is a floating point real number. The minimum value is 0.0, the maximum value 2000.0. The minimum resolution is 0.01. The default value is
0.0.
PredefExpr is optional and one of the following predefined expressions:
M100|FT100. Default is M100.
real3 is a floating point real number and also optional. The minimum
value is 500000, the maximum value 4000000000. The minimum resolution is 0.1. The default value is 4000000000.
Command
This command stores settings for cable types. string1 is the name of the
cable type file in which the parameters are stored. real1 is the cable
dielectric of the cable. real2 is the attenuation of the cable per meter or
feet. PredefExpr sets the attenuation to meter or feet. real3 is the cable
cutoff frequency.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the cable type file which is given
as parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe
"EXT_DEV2",2.4,9.3,"MET",2000000000
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe:CALibration
138
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe:CALibration <real1>,<real2>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number. The minimum value is 1.0, the maximum value 20.0. The minimum resolution is 0.1. The default value is 2.3.
real2 is a floating point real number. The minimum value is 1.0, the maximum value 2000.0. The minimum resolution is 0.01. The default value is
1.0.
Command
This command stores settings for cable type calibration. real1 is the cable
dielectric of the calibration cable. real2 is the length of the calibration
cable per meter.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the calibration cable type file
which is given as parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe:CALibration 2.5,1.5
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:STORe:AFACtor
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:AFACtor
<string1>,<real1freq>,<real1lev>,<real2freq>,
<real2lev>,...,<real100freq>,<real100lev>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
real1freq to real100freq are floating point real numbers. The minimum value is 0, the maximum value 4e9. The minimum resolution is 1.
real1lev to real100lev are floating point real numbers. The minimum
value is -100, the maximum value 30. The minimum resolution is 0.01.
Command
This command stores settings for cable types. string1 is the name of the
cable type file in which the parameters are stored. real1 is the cable
dielectric of the cable. real2 is the attenuation of the cable per meter or
feet. PredefExpr sets the attenuation to meter or feet. real3 is the cable
cutoff frequency.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the external device compensation
file which is given as parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:AFACtor "AFAC2",1000000,-5.1,2000000,
-3.2,5000000,-4.1,10000000,-3.8,20000000,-2.6
:MMEMory:STORe:CFACtor
Syntax
:MMEMory:STORe:CFACtor
<string1>,<real1freq>,<real1lev>,<real2freq>,
<real2lev>,...,<real100freq>,<real100lev>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
real1freq to real100freq are floating point real numbers. The minimum value is 0, the maximum value 4e9. The minimum resolution is 1.
real1lev to real100lev are floating point real numbers. The minimum
value is -100, the maximum value 30. The minimum resolution is 0.01.
Command
This command stores settings for cable factor compensation. string1 is
the name of cable factor compensation file in which the parameters are
stored. realxfreq and realxlev are pairs of frequency and level values
to set the attenuation on this frequency. Between frequency values there is
a linear interpolation for the level.
Query
Reads and returns the parameter sets of the cable factor compensation file
which is given as parameter.
Example
:MMEMory:STORe:CFACtor "CFAC7",1000000,-5.1,2000000,
-3.2,5000000,-4.1,10000000,-3.8,20000000,-2.6
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist[:TRACe]?
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist[:TRACe]? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent. Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the list of files stored in the TRACE directory. The file
names are separated by commas.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
139
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:TRACe?
String returned in this example:
"TRACE1","TRACE2","TRACE3"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:STATe?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:STATe? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent. Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the list of files stored in the SETTINGS directory. The file
names are separated by commas.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:STATe?
String returned in this example:
"SETT1","SETT2","SETT3"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:LIMit?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:LIMit? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent. Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
spectrum limit values stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:LIMit?
String returned in this example:
"LIM1","LIM2"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CHANnel?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CHANnel? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent. Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
channel values stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:CHANnel?
String returned: "GSM900","GSM1800"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:EDEVice?
140
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:EDEVice? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent. Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
external device compensation values stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:EDEVice?
String returned in this example: "EXT_DEV2","EXT_DEV5"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CTYPe?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CTYPe? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent.
Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
a cable type stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:CTYPe?
String returned in this example:
"CABLE2","CABLE5"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:AFACtor?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:AFACtor? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent.
Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
antenna factor compensation stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:AFACtor?
String returned in this example:
"AFAC2","AFAC5"
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CFACtor?
Syntax
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CFACtor? <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: SHORt|EXTent.
Default is SHORt.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns a comma-separated list of file names. Each file contains
cable factor compensation stored on the 9101.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:FILelist:CFACtor?
String returned in this example:
"CFAC7","CFAC8"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
141
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Loads 9101 parameter settings from file string1 located in the SETTINGS
directory on the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe "sett3"
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe <string1>,<PredefExpr>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
PredefExpr is an optional parameter and one of the following predefined
expressions: A|B. Default is A.
Command
Loads 9101 traces from file string1 located in the TRACE directory on
the flash disk to trace A or B.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe "TESTTRACE2"
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Loads 9101 limit settings from file string1 located in the LIMIT directory
on the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit "sett3"
:MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel
142
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11
characters.
Command
Load saved channel data from file <string1> in the CHANNEL directory on
the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel "GSM900"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:LOAD:EDEVice
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:EDEVice <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11
characters.
Command
Loads saved channel data from file <string1> in the external device directory on the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:EDEVice "EXT_DEV2"
:MMEMory:LOAD:CTYPe
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:CTYPe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Loads saved cable type from file in the cable type directory on the flash
disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:CTYPe "RG58"
:MMEMory:LOAD:AFACtor
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:AFACtor <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Load saved cable factor data from file in the cable factor directory on the
flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:CFACtor "CFAC7"
:MMEMory:LOAD:CFACtor
Syntax
:MMEMory:LOAD:CFACtor <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Load saved antenna factor data from file in the antenna factor directory on
the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the file name last loaded with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:LOAD:AFACtor "AFAC2
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
143
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file <string1> in the SETTINGS directory on the flash disk. Files
in this directory usually contain parameter settings of the device.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file last deleted with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe "sett3"
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the SETTINGS directory on the flash disk. These files
usually contain parameter settings of the 9101.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 (saved trace data and parameter settings) from the
TRACE directory on the flash disk.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file last deleted with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe "GSM900"
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the TRACE directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit
144
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 in the LIMIT directory. Files in this directory contain
limit settings of the device.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file last deleted with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit "lim3"
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the LIMIT directory on the flash disk. These files contain spectrum limit settings of the 9101.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 from the CHANNEL directory. Files in this directory
contain channel settings of the device.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file last deleted with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:CHAN "P-GSM"
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the CHANNEL directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 in the external device directory on the flash disk.
Files in this directory contain external device compensation settings on the
9101.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file last deleted with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice "EXT_DEV3
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
145
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
MMemory commands
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the external device directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 in the cable type directory on the flash disk. Files in
this directory contain cable type settings on the 9101.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file deleted last with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe "cable3"
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the cable type directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor
146
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 in the antenna factor directory on the flash disk. Files
in this directory contain antenna factor compensation settings on the 9101.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file deleted last with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor "AFAC2"
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Instrument commands
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the antenna factor directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor:ALL
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor <string1>
Parameters
string1 is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is
11 characters.
Command
Deletes file string1 in the cable factor directory on the flash disk. Files in
this directory contain cable factor compensation settings on the 9101.
Query
Reads and returns the name of the file deleted last with this command.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor "CFAC7"
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor:ALL
Syntax
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor:ALL
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Deletes all the files in the cable factor directory on the flash disk.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor:ALL
Instrument commands
:INSTrument:SELect
Syntax
:INSTrument:SELect <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following expressions:
SANalyzer|CPOWer|
RFLection|CLOSs.
Default is SANalyzer.
Command
Selects the measurement mode. Available modes are spectrum analysis,
and channel power.
Selects the measurement mode. Available modes are spectrum analysis,
channel power, transmission, distance to fault, signal generator, reflection,
cable loss, electro magnetic field and power sensor.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
147
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Display commands
Example
:INSTrument:SELect CPOWer
:INSTrument:SELect?
Returns the following string: "CPOWer"
:INSTrument:EREFfreq
Syntax
:INSTrument:EREFfreq <PredefExpr>
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns whether an external reference frequency is connected
or not.
Example
:INSTrument:EREFfreq?
Returns the following string: "OFF"
Display commands
The display command subsystem affects the screen of the instrument.
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe][:LOGarithmic]
Syntax
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe][:LOGarithmic] <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 1, the maximum is
20. Valid values are 1, 2, 5, 10, 20. The default value is 10.
Command
Holds the upper limit of the power scale but changes the resolution (and
the lower limit) of the scale when int1 defines how many dB per scale unit
are shown on the display.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe][:LOGarithmic] 20
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe][:LOGarithmic]?
The value returned in this example is: "20".
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:VOLT
148
Syntax
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:VOLT <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.00001. The maximum value for real1
is 1.0. The default value for real1 is 0.001.
Command
This command is only in effect when 9101 is set to voltage unit. It holds the
upper limit of the scale but changes the resolution (and the lower limit) of
the voltage scale. real1 defines how many volts per scale unit are shown
on the display. The resolution depends on which unit is set with
SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT. If it set to V the command and query is in Volts.
If it set to MV the command and query is in Milli Volts. If it set to UV the
command and query is in Micro Volts.
Query
Returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Display commands
Example
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:VOLT 0.0005
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:LINear:VOLT?
The value returned in this example is: "0.0005".
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:WATT
Syntax
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:WATT <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.00000000001. The maximum value for
real1 is 0.1. The default value for real1 is 0.000001.
Command
This command is only in effect when 9101 is set to Watt unit. It holds the
upper limit of the scale but changes the resolution (and the lower limit) of
the Watt scale. real1 defines how many Watts per scale unit are shown on
the display. The resolution depends on which unit is set with
SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT. If it set to MW the command and query is in Milli
Watts. If it set to UW the command and query is in Micro Watts.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:WATT 0.0002
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:LINear:WATT?
The value returned in this example is: "0.0002".
:DISPlay:BACKlight[:BATTery]
Syntax
:DISPlay:BACKlight[:BATTery] <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 0, the maximum is
100. The default value is 50.
Command
Sets the brightness of the screen in battery mode. A setting of 100 leads to
the maximum brightness.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:BACKlight 30
:DISPlay:BACKlight?
The value returned in this example is: "30".
:DISPlay:BACKlight:EXTern
Syntax
:DISPlay:BACKlight:EXTern <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 0, the maximum is
100. The default value is 100.
Command
Sets the brightness of the screen when external power supply is connected. A setting of 100 leads to the maximum brightness.
Query
Returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:BACKlight:EXTern 50
:DISPlay:BACKlight:EXTern?
The value returned in this example is: "50".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
149
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Display commands
:DISPlay:BEEP
Syntax
:DISPlay:BEEP <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is ON.
Command
Sets the beep tone on and off.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:BEEP ON
:DISPlay:BEEP?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:[A|B]
Syntax
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:[A|B] <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 1, the maximum is 8.
The default value is 1 for trace A and 3 for trace B.
Command
Sets the color from the color palette for trace A or B.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:A 5
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:A?
The value returned in this example is: "5".
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:OFFSet
Syntax
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:OFFSet <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 1, the maximum is 8.
The default value is 7.
Command
Sets the color from the color palette for the trace offset for the subtracted
trace
(A-B->A trace).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:OFFSet 5
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:OFFSet?
The value returned in this example is: "5".
:DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule
150
Syntax
:DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 1, the maximum is 8.
The default value is 2.
Command
Sets the color from the color palette for the graticule.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule 5
:DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule?
The value returned in this example is: "5".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
:DISPlay:COLor:LIMits
Syntax
:DISPlay:COLor:LIMits <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 1, the maximum is 8.
The default value is 7.
Command
Sets the color from the color palette for the limit lines.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:DISPlay:COLor:LIM 5
:DISP:COL:LIMits?
The value returned in this example is: "5".
Calculate commands
The markers of the 9101 can be set using the calculate commands.
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
All markers are switched off.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALC:MARK:A:STAT NORM
:CALC:MARK:B:STAT DELT
:CALC:MARK:C:STAT DELT
:CALC:MARK:AOFF
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}[:STATe]
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}[:STATe]
<PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
OFF|NORMal|DELTa.
Default is OFF.
Command
Selects an active marker and sets it to one of three different modes:
OFF|NORMal|COUNter or OFF|NORMal|DELTa.
OFF is used to switch off the selected marker.
NORMal switches the selected marker on.
DELTa changes the marker B, C or D to a delta marker; the REF marker is
always A. Marker A cannot be set to DELTa. Only Marker A can be set to
COUNter which switches on the frequency counter.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current setting. The string
delivered back will contain the short-form version of one of the predefined
expressions explained above.
Example
:CALC:MARK:A:STAT NORM
:CALC:MARK:A:STAT?
Value returned in this example: "NORM".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
151
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:DTF[:STATe]
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:DTF[:STATe]
<PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
OFF|NORMal|DELTa.
Default is OFF.
Command
Selects an active marker and sets it to one of three different modes:
OFF|NORMal|COUNter or OFF|NORMal|DELTa.
OFF is used to switch off the selected marker.
NORMal switches the selected marker on.
DELTa changes the marker B, C or D to a delta marker; the REF marker is
always A. Marker A cannot be set to DELTa. Only Marker A can be set to
COUNter which switches on the frequency counter.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current setting. The string
delivered back will contain the short-form version of one of the predefined
expressions explained above.
Example
:CALC:MARK:A:DTF NORM
:CALC:MARK:A:DTF?
Value returned in this example: "NORM".
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:Y?
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:Y?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
The query form of this command returns the level value at the current
marker position set by CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X. The
string delivered will contain one floating point real number with the physical dimension that has been selected for the reference level
(:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT).
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:B:X 2200000000
:CALCulate:MARKer:B:Y?
The value returned is: "-22.4".
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X[:FREQuency]
152
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X[:FREQuency] <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0, the maximum value 7500000000. The
minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1. The default value for real1 is
1800000000.
Command
This command sets the marker frequency for one of the six markers of the
Aeroflex 9101 when in spectrum analysis mode. The physical dimension of
real1 is Hertz.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current marker frequency
setting of the respective marker of the Aeroflex 9101 (A, B, C , D, E or F).
The string delivered back will contain one real number.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X 1500000000
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X?
The value returned in this example is: "1500000000".
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:TIMe
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:TIMe <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.001, the maximum value 250.0. The
minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1. The default value for real1 is
0.0432.
Command
This command sets the marker time for zero-span measurements for one
of the six markers of the Aeroflex 9101. The physical dimension of real1
is seconds.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current marker time setting
of the respective marker of the Aeroflex 9101 (A, B, C, D, E or F). The string
delivered back will contain one real number.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X:TIME 0.5
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X:TIME?
The value returned in this example is: "0.5".
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:DISTance
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:DISTance <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.0, the maximum value 2000.0. The
minimum resolution possible for real1 is 1. The default value for real1 is
0.0432.
Command
This command sets the marker time for distance to fault measurements for
one of the six markers of the Aeroflex 9101. The physical dimension of
real1 is meter or feet, respectively.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current DTF marker length
setting of the respective marker of the Aeroflex 9101 (A, B, C, D, E or F).
The string delivered back will contain one real number.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X:DISTance 10.5
:CALCulate:MARKer:C:X:DISTance?
The value returned in this example is: "10.5".
:CALCulate:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:MARKer:FSTep
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:FSTep
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Sets Marker A, B, C, D, E or F to current frequency step (FSTep).
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:A:FSTep
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
153
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:TSELect
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:TSELect <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: A|B.
Default is A.
Command
Selects an active marker and sets it either to trace A or trace B. Note: Set to
trace B is only possible when trace B is active.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current setting. The string
delivered back will contain the short-form version of one of the predefined
expressions explained above.
Example
:CALC:MARK:A:TSELect B
:CALC:MARK:A:TSELect?
Value returned in this example: "B".
:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXPeak
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXPeak
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Sets the currently selected marker to the maximum measured level. A
marker is "selected" by way of the :CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}[:STATe] command.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXPeak.
:CALCulate:MARKer:NPEak
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:NPEak
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
Sets the currently selected marker to the next highest level value.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:NPEak.
:CALCulate:MARKer:MCENter
154
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:MCENter
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
The center frequency is changed to the current marker frequency.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:MCENter.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:MREFlevel
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:MREFlevel
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
The REFerence level is changed to the level at the marker position.
Query
There is no query form of this command available.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:MREFlevel.
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt?
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns a string with the floating point value for the current result of the frequency counter, in Hz. Marker M1 (CALC:MARK:A COUNter) has to be set
before to get a valid result.
Example
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt?
The value returned in this example is: "2694365000.0".
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution
Syntax
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution <real1>
Parameters
real1 is an integer. The minimum value for <real1> is 1, the maximum is
1000. Valid values are 1, 10, 100, 1000. The default value is 1000.
Command
Sets the counter resolution of the frequency counter in Hz.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALC:MARK:FCO:RES 10
:CALC:MARK:FCO:RES?
The value returned in this example is: "10".
:CALCulate:LIMit[:STATe]
Syntax
:CALCulate::LIMit[:STATe] <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions:
OFF|UPPer|LOWer|UPPLow.
Default is OFF.
Command
Selects the limit lines to one of four different modes:
OFF|UPPer|LOWer|UPPLow.
OFF is used to switch off the limit lines.
UPPer switches only the upper limit line on.
LOWer switches only the lower limit line on.
UPPLow switches both upper and lower limit lines on.
Query
The query form of this command will return the current setting. The string
delivered back will contain the short-form version of one of the predefined
expressions explained above.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
155
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
Example
CALC:LIM:STAT UPPLOW
:CALC:LIM?
Value returned in this example: "UPPL".
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is OFF.
Command
Enables (and resets) or disables the failure counter. When enabled,
requires that limit checking is also active (see CALC:LIM:STAT).
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt ON
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt?
Returns the following string: "ON"
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt:COUNt?
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt:COUNt?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Gets the current count of fails in the limit check.
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt:COUNt?
The value returned in this example is: "5".
:CALCulate:LIMit:FBEep
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:FBEep <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is OFF.
Command
Enables or disables a sound that can be output each time a measurement
fails the limits.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALC:LIMit:FBEep ON
:CALCulate:LIMit:FBEep?
Returns the following string: "ON".
:CALCulate:LIMit:FHOLd
156
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:FHOLd <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is OFF.
Command
Enables or disables hold, if measurement fails the limits.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Calculate commands
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:FHOLd ON
:CALCulate:LIMit:FHOLd?
Returns the following string: "ON".
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle <PredefExpr>
Parameters
PredefExpr is one of the following predefined expressions: ON|OFF.
Default is OFF.
Command
Enables or disables the simple limit lines.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle ON
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle?
Returns the following string: "ON".
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:UPPer
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:UPPer <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.0, the maximum value 8.0. The minimum resolution possible for real1 is 0.1. The default value for real1 is
7.0.
Command
Sets the simple upper limit line. The unit is one grid. 0.0 means the lower
border of the visible display and 8.0 means the upper border.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:UPPer 6
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:UPPer?
The value returned in this example is: "6.0".
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:LOWer
Syntax
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:LOWer <real1>
Parameters
real1 is a floating point real number.
The minimum value for real1 is 0.0, the maximum value 8.0. The minimum resolution possible for real1 is 0.1. The default value for real1 is
1.0.
Command
Sets the simple lower limit line. The unit is one grid. 0.0 means the lower
border of the visible display and 8.0 means the upper border.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:LOWer 2
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:LOWer?
The value returned in this example is: "2.0".
:CALCulate:MEASure:ACPR
Syntax
:CALCulate:MEASure:ACPR?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
157
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Format commands
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns a string containing three floating point values; these represent the
relative power in the lower adjacent channel (in dB), the in-channel power
(in dBm) and the relative power in the upper adjacent channel (in dB).
Example
:CALCulate:MEASure:ACPR?
The value returned in this example is: "-14.9,-31.5,-14.1".
:CALCulate:MEASure:OBW
Syntax
:CALCulate:MEASure:OBW?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns a string with the floating point value for the occupied bandwidth, in
Hz.
Example
:CALCulate:MEASure:OBW?
The value returned in this example is: "2694000.0".
:CALCulate:MEASure:CPOWer
Syntax
:CALCulate:MEASure:CPOWer?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is solely a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns the measured in-channel power, in dBm.
Example
:CALCulate:MEASure:CPOW?
Returns the following string: "-32.2".
NOTE
The :CALCulate:MEASure:CPOWer? command only returns a valid
measurement result after a complete sweep has been made. Should
the channel power be determined before the sweep is complete,
the value -9999 will be returned. This value will also be returned, if
the channel system settings defined cause an invalid measurement
result. The value -9999 always indicates an invalid measurement
value.
Format commands
These commands are used for formatting the SCPI output of the 9101
Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
:FORMat:ADELimiter
158
Syntax
:FORMat:ADELimiter <PredefExp>
Parameters
PredefExp is one of the following predefined expressions:
COMMa|COLOn|SEMIcolon.
Default is COMMa.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Service commands
Command
Selects the delimiter to be used to separate parameters in SCPI commands,
and also to separate the individual measurement result values in a result
return string.
COMMa stands for commas (default),
COLOn sets the delimiter to be a colon (:), while
SEMIcolon will use and expect a semicolon (;) to be used.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:FORM:ADEL
Defines the comma to be used as delimiter for both commands and measurement results.
:FORMat:RESolution
Syntax
:FORMat:RESolution <int1>
Parameters
int1 is an integer. The minimum value for <int1> is 0, the maximum is
20. The default value is 6.
Command
Defines the number of digits after the decimal point to be used for floating
point real figures.
Query
Reads and returns the current setting.
Example
:FORM:RES 0
Defines that there will be no digits after the decimal point.
Service commands
These commands are used for information regarding the status of the
9101.
:SERVice:BOOTversion?
Syntax
:SERVice:BOOTversion?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the version of the boot software of your Aeroflex 9101.
The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:BOOTversion?
String returned in this example: "2.00".
:SERVice:BOOTversion:DATe?
Syntax
:SERVice:BOOTversion:DATe?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the date of the Boot Software of your Aeroflex 9101. The
command will return a string.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
159
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Service commands
Example
:SERVice:BOOTversion:DATe?
String returned in this example: "2004/10/22".
:SERVice:BATTery
Syntax
:SERVice:BATTery?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the the current loading state of the battery in %. The
command will return an integer.
Example
:SERVice:BATTery?
String returned in this example: "40".
:SERVice:BATTery:SERialnumber?
Syntax
:SERVice:BATTery:SERialnumber?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the serial number of the battery of your Aeroflex 9101.
The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:BATTery:SERialnumber?
String returned in this example: "00300402".
:SERVice:POWerline?
Syntax
:SERVice:POWerline?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Returns ON, if the Aeroflex 9101 is connected to the 12 V power line, otherwise returns OFF.
Example
:SERV:POW?
String returned in this example: "OFF".
:SERVice:CHECk:LAST
160
Syntax
:SERVice:CHECk:LAST <int1>,<int2>,<int3>,<string>
Parameters
intx are three integers.
The minimum value for int1 is 1998, the maximum is 2100. The default
value is 1998.
The minimum value for int2 is 1, the maximum is 12. The default value is
1.
The minimum value for int3 is 1, the maximum is 31. The default value is
1.
string is a string (text) parameter. The maximum length of string1 is 16
characters.
Command
Sets date and name of the last check of this device.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Service commands
Query
Reads and returns current settings. The command will return 3 integers
and a string.
Example
:SERVice:CHECk:LAST?
String returned in this example: 2004,04,01,"John Williams".
:SERVice:CHECk:NEXT
Syntax
:SERVice:CHECk:NEXT?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the date of the next check to be performed on this
device. The command will return 3 integers.
Example
:SERVice:CHECk:NEXT?
String returned in this example: 2005,04,01.
:SERVice:DEVice:TYPe?
Syntax
:SERVice:DEVice:TYPe?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the type of your Aeroflex 9101. The command will
return a string.
Example
:SERVice:DEVice:TYPe?
String returned in this example: "9101".
:SERVice:DEVice:TEXT?
Syntax
:SERVice:DEVice:TEXT?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the description text of your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:DEVice:TEXT?
String returned in this example:
"Aeroflex 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer".
:SERVice:DEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
Syntax
:SERVice:DEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the calibration number of your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
161
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
Service commands
Example
:SERVice:DEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
String returned in this example: "1234".
:SERVice:EDEVice:SERialnumber?
Syntax
:SERVice:EDEVice:SERialnumber?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the serial number of the external device connected to
your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:EDEVice:SERialnumber?
String returned in this example: "00100202".
:SERVice:EDEVice:TYPe?
Syntax
:SERVice:EDEVice:TYPe?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the type of the external device connected to your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:EDEVice:TYPe?
Let’s assume that the 9168 GPS Receiver Option is connected to your
9101. String returned in this example: "9168".
:SERVice:EDEVice:TEXT?
Syntax
:SERVice:EDEVice:TEXT?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the description text of the external device connected to
your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:EDEVice:TEXT?
String returned in this example: "VSWR Bridge".
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:DATe?
162
Syntax
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:DATe?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
The command form is not available.
Query
Returns date of last calibration by Aeroflex of the external device connected in the form yyyy,mm,dd.
Example
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:DATe?
String returned in this example: "2004/12/31".
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
SCPI errors
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
Syntax
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
Parameters
There are no parameters.
Command
There is only a query form of this command available.
Query
Reads and returns the calibration number of the external device connected
to your Aeroflex 9101. The command will return a string.
Example
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:NUMBer?
String returned in this example: "1234".
SCPI errors
The following table lists the error numbers which the 9101 may return
in case of a problem.
Error
numbe
r
Error description
Command errors
-100
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (Command
error)
-101
Invalid character in command string
-102
SCPI syntax error: Command is not available as a query,
or vice versa
-103
Invalid separator between parameters
-104
Data type error (mismatch between parameters and
allowable data formats)
-108
Parameter not allowed (too many parameters)
-109
Missing parameter (too few parameters)
-111
Header separator error (probably colon missing
between command keywords)
-112
Program mnemonic too long (i.e. longer than 12 characters)
-113
Keyword not found in command list
-114
Header suffix out of range (invalid character in command keyword)
-121
Invalid character in number (not a digit, or exponent
value missing)
-123
Exponent out of range
-128
Numerical data not allowed
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
163
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
SCPI errors
-131
Invalid suffix (appended unit not found)
-134
Suffix too long (appended unit is longer than 12 characters)
-138
Suffix not allowed (parameter type is not real)
-141
Invalid character data (parameter expression is not in
predefined list)
-144
Character data too long (string data longer than
allowed)
-158
String data not allowed for this parameter type
-160
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (block data
error)
-168
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (block data
not allowed)
Execution errors
-201
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (SCPI execution function not defined)
-202
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (SCPI query
function not defined)
-210
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (out of
memory)
-222
Data out of range
-230
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (invalid
token received by EXEC)
-231
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (invalid
index for parameter)
-232
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (invalid
parameter)
-233
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (parameter
has wrong type)
-234
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (parameter
missing)
-235
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (index error)
-236
Parameter out of range
-260
File name not found in defined directory
-261
File creation failed in defined directory
-262
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (label not
found, config file)
-264
Error while saving or recalling trace file
Device-dependent errors
164
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
SCPI errors
-300
SYSTEM_ERROR
-310
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (error no.
not found)
-311
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (function not
yet supported)
-319
Error queue overflow (more than 10 entries)
-320
Wrong password
-321
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (serial number error)
-322
Wrong option key
-323
Option not available
-330
Download command error
-331
Upload command error
Query errors
-400
Checkrule conflict, parameters outside limits
-401
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (EPROM
write error)
-402
Internal error only, for debugging purposes (EPROM
read error)
-410
Result not valid
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
165
Chapter 7 SCPI Command Reference
SCPI errors
166
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8
9100 Data Exchange Software
8
This chapter describes how to install and use the 9100 Data Exchange
Software. The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:
– “About the 9100 Data Exchange Software” on page 168
– “Installation requirements” on page 168
– “Understanding the license conditions” on page 168
– “Installing the software” on page 168
– “Starting the software” on page 169
– “Connecting the PC to the 9101” on page 170
– “Loading measurement results from the 9101” on page 171
– “Saving, loading and printing results on the PC” on page 175
– “Creating screen shots” on page 179
– “Working with measurement results” on page 180
– “Defining and loading limit templates” on page 183
– “Defining and loading external coupling parameters” on page 187
– “Managing communication systems for channel power measurements” on page 189
– “Managing files on the PC and on the 9101” on page 191
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
167
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
About the 9100 Data Exchange Software
About the 9100 Data Exchange Software
The 9101 is delivered with a software product, the 9100 Data
Exchange Software. This is a tool to load and display measurements
from the 9101 to the PC and to install software updates on the 9101.
Installation requirements
To install the 9100 Data Exchange Software, you need
– a PC with Pentium processor or equivalent
– Windows 98SE, Windows NT or later versions
– a minimum of 32 megabytes of RAM
– 50 megabytes of free space on the hard disk
– a free serial interface or a LAN connection
Understanding the license conditions
Before installing the 9100 Data Exchange Software, ensure that you
understand the license terms which can be found in the appendix
“Software License” on page 227. The software may only be installed on
one computer at any one time!
Installing the software
If you received the software on a CD, just insert the CD in the CD drive
of your PC.
Run 9100DataExchange.exe.
This will start the install wizard which will copy the required files onto
your PC.
Follow the instructions given by the install wizard.
By default, the install wizard will store the program files in the following
directory (assuming an English Windows installation):
C:\Program files\Aeroflex\9100 Data Exchange.
168
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Starting the software
Starting the software
Click Start > Programs > Aeroflex > 9100 Data Exchange to run the 9100
Data Exchange Software.
The following box appears:
To connect to the 9101 via serial connection (RS-232 interface on a
COM port of the PC), select Serial Connection.
To connect to the 9101 via a local area network (LAN) over TCP/IP,
select LAN Connection.
If you do not want to connect to the 9101 but rather open a measurement trace file that has been previously stored on the PC, select Open
existing Trace or Cancel.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
169
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Connecting the PC to the 9101
Connecting the PC to the 9101
In order to connect the PC to the 9101, you need to configure the 9100
Data Exchange Software first.
From the menu bar, select Connection Settings > Serial / LAN for 9100...
This will open the Connect pull-up menu as shown below:
Using a predefined
configuration for the
connection
If you have previously stored configuration data for a successful
connection with the 9101, you can proceed as follows:
1 Connect the 9101 with the PC using a serial interface cable or the
LAN, depending on the configuration you want to use.
2 In the Connect dialog box of the 9100 Data Exchange Software
(see above), load the configuration by selecting a name from the
drop-down list box or in the upper left-hand corner of the Connect
menu. Click on OK to load this configuration.
The PC will now attempt to exchange messages with the 9101 over
the interface defined in the configuration file. The Connect dialog
box will disappear and if a connection has been set up successfully,
the status bar of the PC software will indicate CONNECTED.
Serial interface
connection
1 Select the Serial radio button.
2 Select the baudrate (bit rate) that is set up in the 9101 as well.
3 Select a serial port (e.g. COM1).
4 Switch on the 9101 and connect it to the PC using a null modem
cable as specified in “Connecting the PC to the 9101” on page 170.
5 Click on Check Connection to verify that the connection is working
over the selected COM port.
The PC will now attempt to exchange messages with the 9101 over
170
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Loading measurement results from the 9101
the cable attached to the selected serial port. The Connect dialog
box will disappear and if a connection has been set up successfully,
the status bar of the PC software will indicate CONNECTED.
LAN (TCP/IP) connection
1 In the Connect pull-up menu, select the LAN radio button.
2 Enter the IP address of the 9101. The IP address of the 9101 can be
read and modified over an RS-232 link using the SCPI command;
see “Changing the IP address of the 9101” on page 40 for information on changing the IP address of the 9101.
3 Enter the IP port number in the Port input field. Valid entries are in
the range from 1024 to 65535; the default is 49200.
4 Switch on the 9101 and connect both 9101 and PC to the
computer network with a normal patch cable, or connect them
directly with each other using a cross patch cable.
5 Click on Check Connection to verify that the connection is working
over the selected LAN connection.
The PC will now attempt to exchange messages with the 9101 over
the network. The Connect dialog box will disappear and if a
connection has been set up successfully, the status bar of the PC
software will indicate CONNECTED.
Saving the configuration
You can save the configuration in a file for later use so that you do not
have to reenter the configuration each time you are using 9100 Data
Exchange Software.
1 In the entry field at the upper left-hand corner, enter a configuration name that allows you to identify the configuration that you
have made. Several configurations can be stored under individual
names.
2 Press Store to save the current configuration.
Loading measurement results from the 9101
The 9100 Data Exchange Software can load and display a measurement (trace) from the 9101 in two different ways. The software can load
either the trace currently displayed or a trace that is saved in the 9101
memory. Using the Live Trace command available in the Instrument
menu you can also display a live trace in real mode with updates
continuously performed. Note that the 9100 Data Exchange Software
can hold multiple windows, each with a trace.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
171
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Loading measurement results from the 9101
Viewing the actual trace
on the PC
1 Connect the PC to the 9101 as described on page 170.
2 In the 9100 Data Exchange Software, select Instrument > Display
Trace, or press Ctrl+T, or click on the icon:
The trace is displayed in the program window (see example below).
You can resize or maximize the trace within the program window.
3 To store the results on a local PC drive, select File > Save or File >
Save as and choose a directory and file name.
The trace file is stored on your PC.
NOTE
The trace will also display any active limits. When working in channel
power mode, the trace will include the communication system
name.
Toggling the view mode
You can switch the trace display from landscape to portrait and vice
versa. In order to toggle the view mode proceed as follows:
1 Select View > View Mode. You can also right-click on the screen to
open a right-click menu and select View Mode.
2 Select the view mode Landscape or Portrait. The display changes
accordingly.
Showing and hiding
parameters
172
You can display and hide trace parameters by selecting View > Show
All Parameters or View > Hide All Parameters.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Loading measurement results from the 9101
Showing and hiding
markers
You can display and hide markers by selecting and deselecting View >
Markers Trace A or View > Markers Trace B. On selecting to show the
markers a tick is displayed next to Markers Trace A or Markers Trace B.
Continually loading live
traces
You can also continually load live traces from the instrument in realtime mode which is particulary useful for monitoring ongoing measurements on your PC. To continuosly download traces displayed on the
9101’s screen proceed as follows:
1 Select Instrument > Live Trace, press Ctrl+L, or click on the icon in
the menu bar:
. The Live Trace Screen is displayed. On this
screen you can specify several settings for the live trace process.
2 In the Updates frame select Continuous mode, if you want the live
trace to be updated continuously until you stop the process manually. If you want to specify a fixed number of update cycles after
which the process will be stopped automatically, select the second
control box and enter the number of updates to be performed. In
the Time between updates field, enter the number of seconds
between each update cycle.
3 In the View frame select Open new trace window, if you want to
display the live trace in a separate new window. If you want to overwrite the active trace, select Overwrite active trace window.
4 If you intend to save the live trace in a file on completion of the live
trace update process, select Save as in the Save frame. Now the
Save fields are activated enabling you to select a directory, a file
name and the file type for saving your trace on your PC. You can
save the traces as *.9tm or graphic files (e.g. *.bmp, *.jpg etc.). For
further details on saving traces on your PC refer to “Saving, loading
and printing results on the PC” on page 175.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
173
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Loading measurement results from the 9101
Transferring a saved
trace to the PC
To load the data saved in the 9101 proceed as follows:
1 On the 9101, save the desired measurements in trace files.
2 Connect the PC to the 9101 as described on page 170.
3 In the 9100 Data Exchange Software, select Instrument > Get Trace,
or press Ctrl+G, or click on the icon:
This will load and display a list of trace files that reside on the 9101
(see example below).
4 Select the desired trace file(s) and click View.
The trace is displayed in the program window. You can resize or
maximize the trace within the program window.
5 To store the results on a local PC drive, select the window with the
trace to be stored, select File > Save or File > Save as and choose a
directory and file name. The default directory is Traces inside your
9100 Data Exchange installation directory.
The trace file is stored on your PC with the extension *.9tm differentiating it from the original trace saved on the 9101 and obtained
by the Get Trace procedure. These trace files have the extension
*.9tr.
NOTE
*9tr trace files can also be transferred in both directions using the
Traces tab in the Instrument > Data Transfer... menu.
174
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC
Once a measurement trace has been transferred to the PC, it can be
stored on the hard disk, printed or exported to a graphics or text file.
Storing results on the PC
The trace, along with the 9101 settings and markers, can be saved in a
file and loaded again in a trace file. This way, information about settings
and individual result values will not be lost.
1 Select File > Save or File > Save As ....
A window with a file selection box appears.
2 Select a directory and a file name to save the trace data, and
confirm by pressing ENTER.
The trace data are saved in a file.
Loading a trace file on
the PC
Results previously stored on the PC can be retrieved and displayed in
the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
1 Select File > Open.
A window with a file selection box appears.
2 Select the directory and the file name containing the trace data,
and confirm by pressing ENTER.
The trace data are loaded to the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
Printing measurement
results
Affecting the layout
The following steps help you to choose the best format for your printout:
1 Select File > Print Setup... and set up the correct printer, the paper
orientation and printer-dependent settings. Confirm the changes
made by pressing ENTER.
2 Select Edit > Additional Information... to enter text for two columns
of header information that is to be printed with the trace. The trace
is printed with the filename; use the check box “Show File Path” to
include complete information about the folder where the trace file
is located.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
175
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC
3 You can check the layout before printing by selecting File > Print
Preview.
Printing a trace
Printing several traces
176
Go to the File > Print menu to select the pages to print, and start
printing by pressing ENTER.
If you have opened several documents and you intend to print them in
one go, select File > Print Open Documents....
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC
Saving results to a
graphics file
If you save the results in a graphics file, you can load them in other
applications such as a word processor and include them in your documentation in graphical format. File formats supported are:
– Windows Bitmap (BMP)
– JPEG (JPG/JPEG)
– JPEG2000 (J2K/JP2)
– Tagged Image File Format (TIF/TIFF)
– Zsoft Paintbrush (PCX)
– Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
– Sun Raster (RAS)
– Truevision Targa (TGA)
– Portable Bitmaps (PPM/PGM)
1 Select File > Export > Image.
A file selection box appears (“Save image file”).
2 Select a directory, a file name to save the measurement trace and a
file format, and confirm by pressing ENTER.
The trace data are stored as a graphics file in the selected location.
Saving results to a text
file
You can use the numerical results and include them in other applications for postprocessing, e.g. in Microsoft Excel.
1 Select File > Export > ASCII file.
A file selection box appears (“Save Trace as ASCII File...”).
2 Select a directory and a file name to save the measurement data,
and confirm by pressing ENTER.
The data are stored in a text file (*.TXT) in the selected location.
Each line in the resulting text file contains a parameter from the
settings; the parameter name is separated from its value by a semicolon.
Copying the trace into a
document
The 9100 Data Exchange Software offers two different methods to
copy the trace into a document. The best method depends on how you
intend to process the trace in that document.
Graphics copy and paste
This method is appropriate if you want to use the graphic image as is,
e.g. in a document.
1 Select the trace you want to copy by selecting the apppopriate
number in the Window menu.
2 Select Edit > Copy Graph.
The displayed window is copied into the Windows clipboard.
3 Press Alt+Tab or the mouse to change to the application where you
want to insert the graph (e.g. Microsoft Word).
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
177
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Saving, loading and printing results on the PC
4 Move the cursor to the position where to insert the graph.
5 Press Ctrl+V or select Edit > Paste to insert the graph.
Note
If you want to resize the graph in Microsoft Word, select Format >
Picture and change to the Size tab to resize it.
Note
The 9100 Data Exchange Software copies the window in the size it
currently has on the screen. You can resize the window to copy the
graph in a different size or aspect ratio.
Data copy and paste
You will want to copy the data rather than the graphics if you want to
post-process the data, e.g. in a spreadsheet.
1 Select the trace you want to copy by selecting the apppopriate
number in the Window menu.
2 Select Edit > Copy Data.
All the relevant measurement data and instrument settings are
copied as text into the Windows clipboard.
3 Press Alt+Tab or the mouse to change to the application where you
want to insert the data (e.g. Microsoft Excel).
4 Move the cursor to the position where to insert the data.
5 Press Ctrl+V or select Edit > Paste to insert the data.
The data is copied into the document. Measurement data and
instrument settings are separated by a comma, so most spreadsheet programs will nicely place the data in individual columns.
Note
You can even have Microsoft Excel (or another spreadsheet program) draw the trace: Mark the table containing the measurement
data (e.g. frequency and level points) and call up the Chart Wizard.
178
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Creating screen shots
Creating screen shots
The 9100 Data Exchange Software also offers a Tool for directly
producing screen shots of the software screen displayed on the 9101.
Using the Screen Dump tool you can easily create screen shots, save
them as image files, copy them to the clipboard as well as print them
directly.
In order to create screen shots proceed as follows:
1 Select Instrument > Screen Dump, or press Ctrl+N, or click on the
icon in the menu bar:
. The Screen Dump window is displayed.
2 In order to display the screen currently shown on the 9101 in the
Screen Dump window click on Read Screen. The screen originating
from the 9101 will be displayed in the Screen Dump window as
follows.
3 In order to save the screen shot as an image file click on Save as
Image. A file selection box appears (“Save image file”).
4 Select a directory, a file name to save the measurement trace and a
file format, and confirm by pressing ENTER.
The trace data are stored as a graphics file in the selected location.
5 In order to copy the screen shot for further usage in other applications click on Copy to Clipboard.
6 In order to print the screen shot directly from the Screen Dump
tool click on Print.
NOTE
For best results it is recommended to use a local printer as opposed
to a printer connected to a network.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
179
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Working with measurement results
7 If you intend to create another screen shot, click on Clear Display
and proceed as described.
8 To close the Screen Dump tool click on Exit.
Working with measurement results
To open a measurement trace that has been previously loaded from
the PC, select File > Open.
This will open a file selector box from which you can select a directory
and a trace file.
Adding markers
The 9101 already provides up to six markers; the marker positions are
stored and transferred together with the trace. You can use markers on
trace A and trace B.
In addition to these static markers, you can use additional dynamic
markers on the PC to read out the level values at any displayed
frequency. Up to ten markers per trace are possible.
In order to enable or disable markers on the PC proceed as follows:
1 Select View > Select Trace Markers. You can also right-click on the
screen to open a right-click menu and choose Select Trace
Markers.
The Select Trace Marker window is displayed.
180
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Working with measurement results
– Carry out one or several of the following steps:
– To enable a marker select the required marker by checking the
relevant control box in the Marker area (A1 to A10 or B1 to
B10). To enable a delta marker check the relevant control box in
the Delta Marker area (DA2 to DA10 or DB2 to DB10).
– To put a marker on the maximum peak click on Max Peak.
– To put a marker on the next peak click on Next Peak.
– To put a marker on all peaks (up to the 10 supported markers)
click on Label All Peaks.
– To set a threshold for the Label All Peaks function click on Set
Threshold. The button label changes to Clear Threshold.
Specify your threshold in the field below by clicking on the up
and down arrows. the threshold will be displayed as a read line.
If you want to remove the limit, click on Clear Threshold. After
specifying the threshold only peaks above the threshold will be
labeled.
– To enter descriptions for the markers click on Marker Description. A Marker Description window is displayed. Enter the
descriptions for the markers set and click on OK. Deselect the
text in the Show in Trace box on the right-hand side if you do not
want the text to appear in the graph.
The descriptions will be displayed in the graph with a line
connecting the text with the appropriate marker position.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
181
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Working with measurement results
– To move the marker to another frequency, drag it with the mouse.
Alternatively, use the LEFT/RIGHT (slow movement) or UP/DOWN
(larger steps) cursor keys on the keyboard.
Change the reference
level and scale
In order to change the reference level and scale proceed as follows:
1 Select View > Level. The Level window is displayed.
2 Use the up and down arrows of the Ref. field to specify the reference level.
3 Specify the scale in the Scale field
4 In the Level Unit field you can select a unit from the dropdown list.
182
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading limit templates
Using a grid
The grid of vertical and horizontal lines can be switched on and off with
View > Grid. You can also right-click on the screen to open a right-click
menu and select Grid. The grid is the same as on the 9101, i.e. it
consists of eight horizontal and ten vertical rows.
Entering text
You can add text to the trace and store it with the measurement. This
way, you can add valuable information about the conditions of the
measurement. The comment text will be printed and saved with the
graph but not exported to a graphics or text file.
1 Select View > Comment.
A “Comment” window opens, allowing you to enter text.
2 Enter your text (three lines maximum), then click on Save to have
the 9100 Data Exchange Software store the text along with the
measurements.
Defining and loading limit templates
One of the powerful features of the 9101 is its capability to compare
the measurements with predefined limits. The limits are set in the form
of a template that the actual measurement passes or fails. The template
can be defined on the PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software and
then loaded to the 9101; the 9101 can hold up to 99 templates.
Editing a template may be easier when an example of a typical result
trace is available. The Limits Editing menu of the 9100 Data Exchange
Software cannot only show the actual limit curve (template) but also an
example trace that is stored on the PC.
Templates can be applied to measurements in both the spectrum and
the time domain. An example of a limit template in the time domain is
the power/time template for GSM phones.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
183
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading limit templates
The limits are expressed relative to the grid on the 9101 display, not as
absolute values in terms of frequency (or time) and power. This way,
you can apply the same template to different power levels and frequencies provided that the scales are as intended.
Defining limits
Limits can be defined as a template with an upper and and a lower limit
curve. Each curve consists of a number of straight lines between
points. The Limits menu of the 9100 Data Exchange Software allows
you to enter and display such lines.
The limits are expressed relative to the grid on the screen, with eight
horizontal and ten vertical lines. The coordinates of each point (in x/y
coordinates) correspond to these lines.
To define a new template, proceed as follows:
1 In the 9100 Data Exchange Software, select Tools > Limit Editor...
or click on the icon in the menu bar:
.
The Limit Lines window is displayed, with a limits coordinates table
on the left and the limit lines on the right-hand side.
2 To enter a new limit line, press Insert.
A window appears, allowing you to enter the x/y coordinates for
two points.
3 Select whether you wish to define an upper or lower limit by
selecting one of the Upper Level and Lower Level radio buttons.
4 Enter the coordinates for the first point of the limit line (x1, y1).
184
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading limit templates
5 Enter the coordinates for the second point determining the limit
line (x2, y2). You can also move the limit lines afterwards by dragging them with your mouse.
6 Confirm your choice and close the window by selecting OK.
The window disappears. The values are entered in the limits table
on the left and the limit line is shown in the limit lines graph on the
right.
7 Enter more limit lines as described above to complete the template
according to your requirements.
Changing limit lines
You can change the template by modifying or deleting individual limit
lines:
1 In the table within the Limit Lines window, click on the line that you
want to modify or delete.
The line within the table is highlighted and the corresponding limit
line in the graph is shown in red.
2 To modify the limits, click on Edit or double-click on the row. A
dialog box appears, allowing you to change the limits.
To delete a limit line, click on Delete.
Alternatively, to change the starting or ending point for an existing limit
line, proceed as follows:
1 In the graph within the Limit Lines window, click on the starting
point of a limit line that you want to modify.
2 Point the mouse to the starting or ending point of the limit line,
keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the point to its new
position and release it there.
Displaying an example
trace in the Limits
Editing menu
Storing a template on
the PC
1 In the Limit Lines window, select Overlay Trace.
A file selection box appears.
2 Select a trace file from the default or any other directory, and click
on Open.
The file selection box disappears and the trace data is displayed in
the limit lines box on the right-hand side of the Limit Lines window.
A template can be stored on the PC, e.g. to allow modifications later or
to download it to different 9101 analyzers at any time.
1 In the Limit Lines window, select Save.
A window opens (“Save Limit Lines”).
2 Choose a directory and enter a file name to save your limits
template.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
185
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading limit templates
3 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The limits are saved in a file.
Loading a template from
the PC
To modify or to load a template to a 9101 that has previously been
stored on the PC, proceed as follows:
1 In the Limit Lines window, select Open.
A file selection window appears (“Open Limits File...”).
2 Select the directory and the file containing a template file previously stored with the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
3 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER.
The limits are loaded to the limits table and the graph. You can now
modify the limits (see section “Changing limit lines” above), or
download the limits to the 9101.
Transferring a template
to the 9101
1 Define a template or load it from the PC’s hard disk as described
above.
2 Ensure that the PC is connected to the 9101 either via RS-232 or
LAN.
3 Select Data Transfer.
If the template (characterized by its limit lines) is not yet stored you
will be asked if you want to save it on the PC harddisk. If you
choose not to store the template, your changes will be lost.
The Data Transfer window is displayed with the Limits tab active.
4 Choose a limits file (or multiple files) on the PC side (right-hand
side) of the Data Transfer window, and click on < copy.
The 9101 will, if not done so previously, ask whether to connect to
the 9101. In that case, follow the instructions in section
“Connecting the PC to the 9101” on page 170.
The file name on the 9101 will only carry the first 11 characters of
the file name that was used on the PC.
186
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading external coupling parameters
If a limits file on the PC has been selected for transfer and a limits
file with the same name already exists on the 9101, the 9100 Data
Exchange Software will display a pop-up box with the file name in
question in the header bar, and offer several possibilities:
– Click on Yes if you want to overwrite the file in question.
– Click on No to cancel transmission of the file in question.
– Click on Yes to All to copy all files to the 9101, irrespective of
duplicate file names.
– Click on No to All to prevent overwriting of all files with duplicate
file names.
– Click on Rename to enter a new file name applying to that file
when downloaded to the 9101.
– Click on Cancel to cancel transmission of all files, no matter
whether file names already exist on the 9101 or not.
The 9100 Data Exchange Software will indicate when the download has been completed successfully.
5 On the 9101, press ESCAPE to return to local mode. You can then
start using the limits template.
Defining and loading external coupling parameters
The 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer can compensate a defined
gain or attenuation introduced by external equipment between the
device under test and the 9101. The coupling can be specified in the
9100 Data Exchange Software; several files for different devices can be
defined, stored and downloaded to the 9101. Furthermore, on
installing the 9100 Data Exchange Software two files with external
coupling parameters are automatically saved to the Extdev directory of
your 9100 Data Exchange directory on the PC. Once downloaded, the
compensation of effects from external devices can be switched on and
off at any time. The 9101 takes the coupling factor into account before
presenting the measurement result.
Gain and attenuation are frequency-dependent in most cases; therefore the 9100 Data Exchange Software allows you to enter interpolation points to cover the frequency-dependent coupling factor over the
whole frequency range of interest.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
187
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Defining and loading external coupling parameters
Defining the external
coupling factor
1 Open the External Device Compensation menu by selecting Tools >
External Device Editor... or by pressing Alt+E or by clicking on the
icon:
2 To enter an interpolation point, select Insert.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to enter frequency and level.
3 Enter the frequency, select a unit (from hertz to gigahertz) and
enter the coupling factor (in dB). Positive factors indicate signal
attenuation, negative factors indicate gain in the signal line.
4 Close the box by pressing OK and repeat the last two steps with as
many interpolation points as available.
The frequency-dependent compensation curve appears on the
right-hand side as values are entered.
5 If you want to change a factor, either select a line from the table on
the left-hand side and click on Edit to change the values numerically, or point with the mouse to an interpolation point in the graph
on the right and drag it to a new position.
6 To move the whole interpolation curve up or down in steps of 1 dB,
click on the Level Offset arrow buttons.
7 When completed, save the device compensation values in a file on
the PC: Click on Save, enter a file name and confirm by clicking on
Save.
8 Press Cancel to close the External Device Compensation window.
Loading an external
coupling loss file to the
9101
One or more files with external coupling loss data can be transferred
to the 9101 and reside in the internal memory of the 9101. They will
not be taken into account until they are activated (see “Compensating
gains and losses”).
1 Select Instrument > Data Transfer (Ctrl-D), or in the External Device
Compensation menu, select Data Transfer.
The Data Transfer menu opens.
188
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Managing communication systems for channel power measurements
2 In the External Devices tab, select a directory and file(s) on the
right-hand side and press < copy.
The selected files are transferred to the 9101.
Managing communication systems for channel power measurements
Measurements in channel power mode imply that a communication
system with predefined channel numbers and associated frequencies
has been defined. The 9101 comes with a few systems preinstalled;
more systems are available for download to the 9101 in the 9100 Data
Exchange Software, for example Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and TETRA.
For a complete listing of the communication systems available in the
9100 Data Exchange Software refer to “Predefined channel power
communication systems” on page 213. Here you will also find a listing
of the communication systems preinstalled on the 9101. Other
systems’ data can be easily entered on the PC using the 9100 Data
Exchange Software. Each set of system data can be stored in a separate file; one or multiple files can be downloaded to the 9101. For
downloading and copying system files between the PC and the 9101,
see section “Managing files on the PC and on the 9101” below. Once
data are stored in the 9101, they can be used as described in section
“Operating in channel power mode” on page 80.
Editing communication
system parameters on
the PC
1 Select Tools > Channel System Editor... or by pressing Alt+C or by
clicking on the icon in the menu bar:
.
The Channel System menu appears.
2 If you want to edit a communication system that is already stored
on the PC, press Open, select the appropriate directory and file,
and press ENTER or click on Save.
3 Enter the first and the last valid channel number of the system.
4 In the Channel Width line, enter the measurement bandwidth
(separate input fields for value and unit).
5 In the Channel Spacing line, enter the frequency spacing (including
the unit) between consecutive channel numbers.
6 Enter the carrier frequency (including the unit) corresponding to
the first channel number in the 1st Ch. Center line.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
189
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Working with settings
7 Click on Save.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to enter a name for the file in
which the channel system parameters of the communication
system shall be stored.
8 Enter a file name and press ENTER or click on Save.
The data are stored and the dialog box disappears.
9 To transfer the data to the 9101, press Data Transfer. To close the
Channel System window, press Cancel.
Working with settings
The 9101 allows to store and recall settings (see section “Working with
stored settings” on page 45). This can be useful when you want to
perform measurements under exactly the same conditions as at an
earlier time. With the 9100 Data Exchange Software, you can transfer
the settings from a 9101 to the PC for backup purposes or to replicate
the settings to another 9101. Another useful application is to manipulate settings on the PC; this is easily done because the settings file is
editable and the format consists of SCPI commands. Changing or
adding a setting is equivalent to changing or adding a line in the
settings file.
Exchanging a settings
file between 9101 and
PC
The settings stored on the 9101 can be copied to the PC with the 9100
Data Exchange Software. Use the Settings tab within the Data Transfer
utility to copy files between the PC and the 9101. See section
“Managing files on the PC and on the 9101” on page 191 for more
details.
Changing 9101 settings
on the PC
Take the following steps to change and amend a settings file for later
transfer and usage on the 9101.
1 In the 9100 Data Exchange Software, select Tools > Setting Editor
or press Alt+S.
The 9100 Settings box appears.
2 Click on Open to open an existing settings file on the PC. The Open
Settings File... dialog box appears.
3 Select the directory and settings file that you want to modify, and
click on Open. An additional program window with the Microsoft
Windows text editor Notepad opens, and the selected file is
displayed.
190
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101
4 Modify or add lines with SCPI commands for the desired settings.
Refer to chapter “SCPI Command Reference” on page 105 for
correct syntax and value range of the parameters.
5 Save and close the file within Notepad, and return to 9100 Data
Exchange Software to transfer the file to the 9101.
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101
There are various types of settings which can be maintained from the
PC using the 9100 Data Exchange Software. This section explains how
data can be transferred between the 9101 and the PC, maintained and
deleted.
File types and directory
structure
Each type of setting stored on the PC has a preferred file name extension and directory for different sets of parameters. The table below
summarizes this file structure.
Table 12 Configuration file types
Type
File
names
Directory
Traces
*.9tr
9100 Data Exchange\Traces
Modified traces
saved on the PC
*.9tm
9100 Data Exchange\Traces
Settings
*.9st
9100 Data Exchange\Settings
Limits
*.9lm
9100 Data Exchange\Limits
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
191
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101
Table 12 Configuration file types
Starting the File Manager
Type
File
names
Directory
Systems
*.9sy
9100 Data Exchange\Systems
External device
*.9ed
9100 Data Exchange\Extdev
DTF cable type
*.9ct
9100 Data Exchange\Cable
Types
EMF antenna factor
*.9af
9100 Data Exchange\Antenna
Factor
EMF cable factor
*.9cf
9100 Data Exchange\Cable Factor
The files on the PC and on the 9101 can easily be selected, copied and
deleted via the Data Transfer window.
1 In the 9100 Data Exchange Software, select Instrument > Data
Transfer (or Ctrl-D).
The Data Transfer window is displayed.
2 Select the appropriate tab (Traces, Settings, Limits, Systems, Ext.
Device) either by clicking on it with the mouse, or by moving the
tab selection with the << and >> buttons.
The window displays the appropriate files available on the 9101 on
the left-hand side, and the appropriate files available on the PC on
the right-hand side. Files on the PC have a file extension and can
be stored on any drive and in any directory; there are no directories available on the 9101.
192
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101
NOTE
File names on the 9101 only carry 11 characters. When copying a file
from the PC to the 9101 that has more than 11 characters, the file
name will be truncated. Only trace files with the extension *.9tr can
be transferred to the 9101.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
193
Chapter 8 9100 Data Exchange Software
Managing files on the PC and on the 9101
Copying configuration
files from the 9101 to
the PC
Files can be copied in both directions.
1 Select a PC directory where the file shall be stored or from which it
shall be copied.
2 Select one or several files for copying, either on the PC or on the
9101.
3 Press < copy to transfer the files from the PC to the 9101.
or
Press copy > to transfer files to the PC.
If a file on one side has been selected for transfer and a file with
the same name already exists on the other, the 9100 Data
Exchange Software will display a pop-up box with the file name in
question in the header bar, and offer several possibilities:
– Click on Yes if you want to overwrite the file in question.
– Click on No to cancel transmission of the file in question.
– Click on Yes to All to copy all files, irrespective of duplicate file
names.
– Click on No to All to prevent overwriting of all files with duplicate
file names.
– Click on Rename to enter a new file name applying to that file
when transferred.
4 Click on Cancel to cancel transmission of all files, no matter
whether file names already exist on the receiving side or not.
Deleting files
1 To delete a file either on the 9101 or on the PC, select (highlight)
the file name first. Several files may be selected concurrently by
holding the Shift or Ctrl key pressed while selecting individual files.
2 Click on the Delete button
above the files marked for deletion.
A box appears asking, “Are you sure to delete the selected items?”
3 Click on Yes to confirm deletion.
The selected files are removed.
194
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9
Programming Examples
9
This chapter provides examples how to use the SCPI commands to set
up and control the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
– “Overview” on page 196
– “Command examples” on page 196
– “Application examples” on page 204
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
195
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Overview
Overview
This chapter describes how to control the 9101 from a personal
computer via a serial or LAN connection. It explains the basic
commands for the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer and describes a
few typical applications together with the SCPI command sequence.
This documents does not show every command possible. It is assumed
that the user has some basic knowledge about remote control and also
some experience in the use of a spectrum analyzer.
Command examples
Introduction
The whole command set can be divided into three categories: settings,
measurements and others. Each category is descriped in a separate
section.
The word <val> stands for a numerical value.
The word <enum> is a placeholder for a string.
Prerequisites
Over serial interface
The 9101 must be powered on. A serial cable (null modem cable with
crossed lines) must connect the 9101 with the PC. The interface
settings should be set to 57600 bps, 8 bits per character, no parity, 1
stop bit.
Over LAN interface
The 9101 must be powered on. A crosspatch LAN cable must connect
the 9101 with the PC, or a normal LAN cable must connect the 9101
to a local area network. The 9101 must be programmed with its own IP
address.
Settings
Please note that the 9101 always tries to execute the commands.
However, under some circumstances, the 9101 must adjust or change
other settings. If this happens, please check all previous settings and
try to resolve this conflict.
Center frequency
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer <val>
Sets the center frequency in Hz.
196
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:FREQUENCY:CENTER 96500000
Center frequency set to 96.5 MHz
Short format:
SENS:FREQ:CENT 96.5E06
Span
Center programmed to 96.5 MHz
SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN <val>
Sets the span (dimension Hz)
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:FREQUENCY:SPAN 20000000
Span programmed to 20 MHz
Short format:
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20E06
Span programmed to 20 MHz
SENS:FREQ:SPAN:FULL
Full span programmed
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 0
Resolution bandwidth
Zero span activated
SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution <val>
Sets the resolution bandwidth (dim. Hz)
Valid values for <val>: 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz or 1 MHz.
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 30000
Resolution set to 30 kHz
Short format:
SENS:BAND:RES 30E03
Resolution set to 30 kHz
SENS:BAND:RES:AUTO ON
Video bandwidth
Automatic selection active
SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo <val>
Sets the video bandwidth (dim. Hz)
Valid values for <val>: 100, 300 Hz. 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz or 1
MHz.
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:BANDWIDTH:VIDEO 300000
Short format:
SENS:BAND:VID 10E03
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Video set to 300 kHz
Video set to 10 kHz
Software version 5.31
197
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
SENS:BAND:VID:AUTO ON
Sweep time
SENSe:SWEep:TIME <val>
Automatic selection active
Sets the sweep time (dimension ms)
Valid values for <val>: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 or 500 ms; 1, 2, 5,
10 or 20 s.
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:SWEEP:TIME 200
Short format:
SENS:SWE:TIME 10
SENS:SWE:TIME:AUTO ON
Reference level
SENSe:RFLevel <val>
Sweep time set to 200 ms
Sweep time set to 10 ms
Automatic selection active
Defines the reference level (in dBm)
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:RFLEVEL -30.0
Short format
SENS:RFL 10
Scale
DISPlay:TRACe:Y <val>
Reference level set to -30.0 dBm
Reference level set to +10 dBm
Defines scale per div. (in dB)
Examples:
Long format:
DISPLAY:TRACE:Y 10
Short format:
DISPL:TRAC:Y 20
Input attenuation
INPut:ATTenuation <val>
Scale set to 10 dB per division
Scale set to 20 dB per div.
Sets the input attenuation (in dB)
Valid input attenuation values: 0, 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 dB.
WARNING
Be careful with 0 dB. This value may damage the unit if the actual
power is too high.
Examples:
Long format:
INPUT:ATTENUATION 10
198
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
10 dB attenuation
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
Short format:
INP:ATT 20
Detector
20 dB attenuation
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion <enum>
Sets the behavior of the detector
Valid entries for <val>: POSNeg, SAMPle, POSitive or NEGative.
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:DETECTOR:FUNCTION POSITIVE
Positive sampling
Short format:
SENS:DET:FUNC NEG
Trace
SENSe:TRACe:<x> <enum>
Negative sampling
Sets the trace behavior for trace A or B
<x> is the trace (A or B)
Valid entries for <enum> are: ACTual, MAXHold, MINHold, HOLD, AVG
or OFF.
Examples:
Marker
Long format:
SENSE:TRACE:A ACTUAL
Normal trace for A
Short format:
SENS:TRAC:B AVG
Average trace for B
CALCulate:MARKer:<x>:X <val>
Sets the marker frequency (in Hz)
<x> is the trace (A to D)
Examples:
Long format:
CALCULATE:MARKER:B:X 98500000
Short format:
CALC:MARK:A:X 1.2E09
Marker B set to 98.5 MHz
Marker A set to 1.2 GHz
CALC:MARK:AOFF
All markers disabled
CALC:MARK:C:OFF
Only marker C disabled
CALC:MARK:MAXP
Selected marker set to MaxPeak
CALC:MARK:NPE
Selected marker set to NextPeak
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
199
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
Measurements
Trace
SENSe:TRACe:<x>:FETCh? <enum>
Reads the trace data in a definable format
<x> is the trace (A or B)
Valid entries for <enum>: ALL, MIN, MAX, FREQ, FMIN or FMAX.
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:TRACE:A:FETCH? ALL
Short format:
SENS:TRAC:B:FETC? MAX
All measured data requested
Trace B (only MAX) requested
Format examples:
ALL:
<min level>, <max level>, <freq>, <min level>, …
MAX:
<max level>, <max level>, ….
MIN:
<min level>, <min level>, ….
FREQ:
<freq>, <freq>, ….
FMAX:
level>, ….
<max level>, <freq>, <max level>, <freq>, <max
FMIN:
level>, ….
<min level>, <freq>, <min level>, <freq>, <min
NOTE
One trace contains 500 samples.
Sweep
SENSe:SWEep:STATe <enum>
Controls the sweep
Valid entries for <enum>: CONTinuous, SINGle or HOLD
Examples:
Long format:
SENSE:SWEEP:STATE SINGLE
Short format:
SENS:SWE:STAT CONT
200
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
One sweep performed
Repetitive sweeps started
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
Max Peak
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXPeak
Sets the marker to the maximum peak
Examples:
Long format:
CALCULATE:MARKER:MAXPEAK
Marker set to max. peak
Short format:
CALC:MARK:MAXP
Marker set to max. peak
NOTE
A marker must be activated first using the following command:
CALC:MARKer:<x>[:STATE] {NORMal|DELTa|NOISe}.
Next Peak
CALCulate:MARKer:NPEak
Sets the marker to the next highest peak
Examples:
Long format:
CALCULATE:MARKER:NPEAK
Marker set to the next peak
Short format:
CALC:MARK:NPE
Marker set to the next peak
NOTE
A marker must be activated first using the following command:
CALC:MARKer:<x>[:STATE] {NORMal|DELTa|NOISe}.
Marker level
CALCulate:MARKer:<x>:Y?Reads the level at the actual marker position
<x> selects the trace (A to D)
Examples:
Marker frequency
Long format:
CALCULATE:MARKER:B:Y?
Marker B level requested
Short format:
CALC:MARK:A:Y?
Marker A level requested
CALCulate:MARKer:<x>:X?
Reads the actual marker frequency
<x> selects the trace (A to D)
Examples:
Long format:
CALCULATE:MARKER:B:X?
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Marker B frequency requested
Software version 5.31
201
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
Short format:
CALC:MARK:A:X?
Marker A frequency requested
Others
Identity
*IDN?
Reads serial number of the instrument
Format returned: "<Manufacturer>, <Model>, <Serial number>,
<Software version>"
Manufacturer:
Aeroflex
Model:
9101
Serial number:
(seven digits)
Software version: 2.00 (for example)
Reset
*RST
Resets the unit
Example:
*RST
Error queue
Unit set to idle state
SYST:ERR?
Queries the error queue
Format returned: <Error number>, "<Error description>"
If no error is present, 0,"No Error" is returned.
NOTE
The error queue can hold up to 10 error messages. Read always
until the NO ERROR is given back.
Echo
SYST:COMM:ECHO <enum>
Enables/disables echo function
Range: ON or OFF.
Example:
SYST:COMM:ECHO ON
Echo feature activated
NOTE
We recommend to always activate the echo. It gives back "OK" after
a command was successfully executed or in case of errors "ERR".
202
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Command examples
The additional advantage of this is to create a kind of handshake mechanism.
Local mode
SYST:COMM:LOCAL
Switches unit back to local mode
Example:
SYST:COMM:LOCAL
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Remote session finished
Software version 5.31
203
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Application examples
Application examples
The application examples below use three subroutines which transmit
a command (Output9100), read a result (Input9100) or send a
command and read the acknowledgement (OutAck9100). These
subroutines are not printed here but available from Aeroflex on
request. The program examples are written in BASIC.
Signal monitoring
Task: Permanently monitor a signal and check, if it is still present. The
signal frequency is 97.3 MHz and the signal strength is around -40
dBm.
OutAck9100 ("SENS:FREQ:CENT 97300000")' set the center to the
frequency
OutAck9100 ("SENS:FREQ:SPAN 2E06")' set span to 2 MHz
OutAck9100 ("SENS:REFL -30")
OutAck9100 ("INP:ATT 10")
OutAck9100 ("SENS:TRAC:A ACT")
OutAck9100 ("SENS:DET:FUNC POS")
' set a sensitive ref level
' set a low attenuation
' activate an normal trace
' use only positive samples
OutAck9100 ("CALC:MARK:AOFF")
' switch all markers off
OutAck9100 ("CALC:MARK:A NORM") ' activate marker A
SIG_FLAG = True
While SIG_FLAG = True
OutAck9100 ("SENS:SWE:STAT SING")' do one measurement
OutAck9100 ("CALC:MARK:A:X 97.3E06")' set marker to the signal
Output9100 ("CALC:MARK:A:Y?")
Lvl = Val(Input9100())
If Lvl < -45 Then SIG_FLAG = False
Wend
' read the signal level
' signal lost
Print "Signal disappeared!!!"
204
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Application examples
Signal search
Task: Search for transmitters within a frequency band. If a signal is
present and higher than a level of -80 dBm, the frequency is printed.
OutAck9100 ("SENS:FREQ:SPAN 2000000")' set span to 2 MHz
OutAck9100 ("SENS:FREQ:CENT 936000000")' start with channel 0
OutAck9100 ("SENS:REFL -40")
OutAck9100 ("INP:ATT 0")
OutAck9100 ("SENS:TRAC:A MAXH")
OutAck9100 ("SENS:DET:FUNC POS")
' set a sensitive ref-level
' remove any attenuation !!
' activate a max hold trace
' use only positive samples
OutAck9100 ("CALC:MARK:AOFF")
' switch all markers off
channel = 1
For I = 9360 To 9594 Step 18
' scan the gsm band in small portions
Msg$ = "SENS:FREQ:CENT" & Str$(I) & "00000"
OutAck9100 (Msg$)
' set frequeny
For J = 0 To 4
OutAck9100 ("SENS:SWE:STAT SING")' do the measurements 5
times
Next J
Output9100 ("SENS:TRAC:A:FETC? MAX")
MXdata$ = Input9100()
' read trace data
For J = 0 To 499
' isolate the data into an
array
P = InStr(MXdata$, ",") ' search for the COMMA between two
values
Yfeld(J) = Val(Mid$(MXdata$, 1, P))
MXdata$ = Right$(MXdata$, Len(MXdata$) - P)
' remove the actual value
Next J
For J = 45 To 445 Step 50
P = -120
For K = 0 To 8
If Yfeld(J + K) > P Then
P = Yfeld(J + K)
End If
Next K
' do a maximum search
' store the new maximum
If P > -80 And channel < 125 Then ' blocked channel found
Print "Channel " & Str$(channel) & " = " & Str$(P) & " dBm."
End If
channel = channel + 1
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
205
Chapter 9 Programming Examples
Application examples
Next J
Next I
206
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix A
Index of SCPI Commands
A
:CALCulate:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:MARKer:FSTep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:FBEep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:FCOunt:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:FHOLd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:LOWer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit:SIMPle:UPPer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:LIMit[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:DTF[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:TSELect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:DISTance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X:TIMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:X[:FREQuency] . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}:Y? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:{A|B|C|D|E|F}[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:MAXPeak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:MCENter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:MREFlevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MARKer:NPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MEASure:ACPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MEASure:CPOWer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:CALCulate:MEASure:OBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:BACKlight:EXTern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:BACKlight[:BATTery] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:BEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:COLor:LIMits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:[A|B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:COLor:TRACe:OFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:VOLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
153
156
156
156
156
157
157
157
155
152
154
153
153
152
152
151
151
155
155
154
154
155
154
157
158
158
149
149
150
150
151
150
150
148
207
Appendix A Index of SCPI Commands
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LINear:WATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe][:LOGarithmic] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:FORMat:ADELimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:FORMat:RESolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:HCOPy[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:AFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:ATTenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:EDEVice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INPut:IMPedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INSTrument:EREFfreq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:INSTrument:SELect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:AFACtor:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CFACtor:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CHANnel:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:CTYPe:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:EDEVice:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:LIMit:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:STATe:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:DELete:TRACe:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:AFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:CTYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:EDEVice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:AFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:CTYPe:CALibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:EDEVice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:AFACtor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CFACtor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CHANnel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:CTYPe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:EDEVice? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:LIMit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:MMEMory[:LOAD]:FILelist[:TRACe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
149
148
158
159
106
135
134
134
135
134
134
148
147
146
147
147
147
145
145
146
146
145
146
144
145
144
144
144
144
143
143
142
143
143
142
142
142
139
139
137
138
138
137
136
135
136
141
141
140
141
140
140
140
139
Appendix A Index of SCPI Commands
:REBoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:CPOWer:CHANnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:CPOWer:MEASure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:CPOWer:OBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:CPOWer:SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:DEMod:DEMod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:DEMod:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:DEMod:VOLume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:DEMod[:MODulation] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:FSTep:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP:MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:MEASure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:MEASure:ADJSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:SPACing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:MEASure:CHANnel:WIDTh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:MEASure:OBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:REFLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:REFLevel:OFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:REFLevel:UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:SWEep:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:A:FETCh? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:A[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:AVGFactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:B:FETCh? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:B[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa:LIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:DATa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:[A|B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRACe:MATH:OFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRIGger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRIGger:EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SENSe:TRIGger:LEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:BATTery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:BATTery:SERialnumber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:BOOTversion:DATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:BOOTversion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
106
119
119
119
120
123
123
123
123
126
126
126
125
127
120
122
122
122
120
121
121
121
122
132
133
133
133
132
131
132
131
132
124
124
124
128
127
129
129
128
129
129
130
130
130
130
131
125
125
125
160
160
159
159
209
Appendix A Index of SCPI Commands
:SERVice:CHECk:LAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:CHECk:NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:DEVice:CALibration:NUMBer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:DEVice:TEXT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:DEVice:TYPe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:EDEVice:CALibration:DATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:EDEVice:SERialnumber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:EDEVice:TEXT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:EDEVice:TYPe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SERVice:POWerline? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:IPADdress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:SUBNetmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TERMinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet:TNAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:ETHernet? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LOCal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:BAUDrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SER:TERMinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:DNAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:OPTions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:PRINter:BAUDrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:PRINter:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:SCReendump:COLor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:SCReendump:LINe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:SCReendump:REMote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*IDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
160
161
161
161
161
162
162
162
162
160
113
114
114
114
115
114
113
113
115
115
112
117
116
116
116
116
117
118
118
117
118
118
112
107
107
109
109
107
108
107
108
110
111
108
Appendix B
Predefined Settings
B
This appendix provides an overview on settings and parameters
predefined on the 9101 as well as in the 9100 Data Exchange Software
for your convenience. The topics discussed in this appendix are as
follows:
– “Predefined measurement settings” on page 212
– “Predefined channel power communication systems” on page 213
– “Predefined cable types” on page 217
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
211
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined measurement settings
Predefined measurement settings
The 9101 provides the capability of storing all parameters for a particular measurement for reuse when repeating the measurement under
the same conditions. In the 9100 Data Exchange Software delivered
with your instrument a number of predefined settings for common
measurements are available. For details on working with these settings
refer to “Working with settings” on page 190.
The following table provides an overview on the settings available
within the 9100 Data Exchange Software. The names for the
predefined settings files have prefixes assigned to them indicating the
measurement modes used for performing the individual measurements:
– SP for spectrum analysis mode
– CH for channel power mode
– SG for signal generator mode
– TR for transmission mode
– RFL for reflection mode
– DTF for distance to fault mode
– CL for cable loss mode
– EMF for EMF (EMI) mode
Table 1
212
Predefined measurement settings
Name
Meaning
Frequency range
SP-UKW
Ultra short wave
87.5 to 108 MHz
SP-DAB I
Digital audio broadcast
band I
223 to 230 MHz
SP-DAB II
Digital audio broadcast
band II
1452 to 1479.5
MHz
SP-VHF I
Very high frequency TV
band I
47 to 68 MHz
SP-VHF III
Very high frequency TV
band III
174 to 230 MHz
SP-UHF IV
Ultra high frequency TV
band IV
470 to 606 MHz
SP-UHF V
Ultra high frequency TV
band V
606 to 862 MHz
SP-LNB
SAT-ZF
950 to 2050 MHz
RFL-GSM900
GSM 900 frequency range
875 to 965 MHz
RFLGSM1800
GSM 1800 frequency
range
1700 to 1890
MHz
RFL-UMTS
UMTS band I frequency
range
1890 to 2200
MHz
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined channel power communication systems
Predefined channel power communication systems
Measurements in channel power mode imply that a communication
system with predefined channel numbers and associated frequencies
has been defined. The 9101 comes with a few systems preinstalled.
More systems are available for download to the 9101 in the 9100 Data
Exchange Software. The following two sections provide you with an
overview on the communication systems preinstalled on your 9101 as
well as on the systems available in the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
Preinstalled systems on
the 9101
Table 2
The following table lists all communication systems preinstalled as a
default on your 9101. For details on working with the preinstalled
systems refer to “Working with communication systems and frequency
settings” on page 81.
Default preinstalled channel power systems
System
name
Meaning
DECT
Frequency
range
Channel
numbers
(n)
Center frequencies
(fc)
Channel
width
1880 to 1900
MHz
0 to 9
fc = 1897.344 n*1.728
1728 kHz
PGSM900DL
Primary
GSM Downlink
935 to 960
MHz
1 to 124
fc = 935 + 0.2*n
200 kHz
RGSM900DL
Railways
GSM Downlink
921 to 960 MHz
955 to
1023
fc = 935 + 0.2*(n1024)
200 kHz
PCN1800DL
GSM 1800
Downlink
1805 to 1880
MHz
512 to
885
fc = 1805.2 + 0.2*(n512)
200 kHz
PCS1900DL
GSM 1900
Downlink
1930 to 1990
MHz
512 to
810
fc = 1930.2 + 0.2*(n512)
200 kHz
WCDMA-DL
UTRA-FDD
Downlink
2110 to 2170
MHz
10562 to
10838
fc = n / 5
5 MHz
WCDMA-UL
UTRA-FDD
Uplink
1920 to 1980
MHz
9612 to
9888
fc = n / 5
5 MHz
WLAN
IEEE
802.11b,g
2400 to 2484
MHz
1 to 13
fc = 2412 + (n-1)*5
22 MHz
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
213
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined channel power communication systems
Predefined systems in
the 9100 Data Exchange
Software
Table 3
The following table lists all further communication systems available in
the 9100 Data Exchange Software for download to the 9101. For
details on using these systems refer to “Managing communication
systems for channel power measurements” on page 189.
9100 Data Exchange Software channel power systems
System name
Meaning
Frequency
range
Channel
numbers
(n)
Center frequencies
(fc)
Channel
width
GSM450-UL
GSM 450
Uplink
450.4 to
457.6 MHz
259 to
293
fc = 450.6 + 0.2*(n 259)
200 kHz
GSM450-DL
GSM 450
Downlink
460.4 to
467.6 MHz
259 to
293
fc = 460.6 + 0.2*(n 259)
200 kHz
GSM480-UL
GSM 480
Uplink
478.8 to 468
MHz
306 to
340
fc = 479 + 0.2*(n 306)
200 kHz
GSM480-DL
GSM 480
Downlink
488.8 to 496
MHz
306 to
340
fc = 489 + 0.2*(n 306)
200 kHz
GSM850-UL
GSM 850
Uplink
824 to 849 MHz
128 to
251
fc = 824.2 + 0.2*(n 128)
200 kHz
GSM850-DL
GSM 850
Downlink
869 to 894
MHz
128 to
251
fc = 869.2 + 0.2*(n 128)
200 kHz
EGSM900-UL
Extended
GSM
Uplink
880 to 915 MHz
975 to
1023
fc = 890 + 0.2*(n 1024)
200 kHz
EGSM900-DL
Extended
GSM
Downlink
925 to 960 MHz
975 to
1023
fc = 935 + 0.2*(n 1024)
200 kHz
PGSM900-UL
Primary
GSM
Uplink
890 to 915 MHz
1 to 124
fc = 890 + 0.2*n
200 kHz
RGSM900-UL
Railways
GSM
Uplink
876 to 915 MHz
955 to
1023
fc = 890 + 0.2*(n 1024)
200 kHz
PCN1800-UL
GSM 1800
Uplink
1710 to 1785
MHz
512 to
885
fc = 1710.2 + 0.2*
(n -512)
200 kHz
PCS1900-UL
GSM 1900
Uplink
1850 to 1910
MHz
512 to
810
fc = 1850.2 + 0.2*
(n - 512)
200 kHz
BLUETOOTH
USA/
Europe
2402 to 2480
MHz
0 to 78
fc = 2402 + n
1 MHz
USCELL-UL
U.S. cellular Uplink
824 to 849 MHz
1 to 799
fc = 825 + 0.03*n
1.25 MHz
USCELL-DL
U.S. cellular Downlink
869 to 894
MHz
1 to 799
fc = 870 + 0.03*n
1.25 MHz
214
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined channel power communication systems
Table 3
9100 Data Exchange Software channel power systems (Continued)
System name
Meaning
Frequency
range
Channel
numbers
(n)
Center frequencies
(fc)
Channel
width
USPCS-UL
North
America
PCS Uplink
1850 to 1910
MHz
0 to 1199
fc = 1850 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
USPCS-DL
North
America
PCS Downlink
1930 to 1990
MHz
0 to 1199
fc = 1930 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
TACS-UL
TACS
Uplink
872 to 915 MHz
0 to 1000
fc = 889.9875 +
0.025*n
1.25 MHz
TACS-DL
TACS
Downlink
917 to 960 MHz
0 to 1000
fc = 934.9875 +
0.025*n
1.25 MHz
JTACS-UL
JTACS
Uplink
887 to 925 MHz
1 to 799
fc = 915 + 0.0125*n
1.25 MHz
JTAGS-DL
JTACS
Downlink
832 to 870 MHz
1 to 799
fc = 860 + 0.0125*n
1.25 MHz
KORPCS-UL
Korean
PCS Uplink
1850 to 1780
MHz
0 to 599
fc = 1750 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
KORPCS-DL
Korean
PCS Downlink
1840 to 1870
MHz
0 to 599
fc = 1840 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
NMT450-UL
NMT-450
Uplink
411 to 484 MHz
1 to 300
fc = 450 + 0.025*(n 1)
1.25 MHz
NMT450-DL
NMT-450
Downlink
421 to 494 MHz
1 to 300
fc = 460 + 0.025*(n 1)
1.25 MHz
IMT2000-UL
IMT-2000
Uplink
1920 to 1980
MHz
0 to 1199
fc = 1920 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
IMT2000-DL
IMT-2000
Downlink
2110 to 2170
MHz
0 to 1199
fc = 2110 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
CDMA700-UL
CDMA
700 MHz
Uplink
776 to 794 MHz
0 to 359
fc = 776 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
CDMA700-DL
CDMA
700 MHz
Downlink
746 to 764 MHz
0 to 359
fc = 746 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
CDMA1800UL
CDMA
1800 MHz
Uplink
1710 to 1785
MHz
0 to 1499
fc = 1710 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
CDMA1800DL
CDMA
1800 MHz
Downlink
1805 to 1880
MHz
0 to 1499
fc = 1805 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
215
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined channel power communication systems
Table 3
9100 Data Exchange Software channel power systems (Continued)
System name
Meaning
Frequency
range
Channel
numbers
(n)
Center frequencies
(fc)
Channel
width
CDMA900UL
CDMA
900 MHz
Uplink
880 to 915 MHz
0 to 699
fc = 880 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
CDMA900DL
CDMA
900 MHz
Downlink
925 to 960 MHz
0 to 699
fc = 925 + 0.05*n
1.25 MHz
216
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
Predefined cable types
For DTF measurements in the distance to fault measurement mode
Aeroflex provides predefined cable types for most known coaxial
cables. These cable types are available in the 9100 Data Exchange
Software. You can upload the cable types you use frequently to the
9101.
The following table provides an overview on all predefined cable types
implemented in the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
Table 4
9100 Data Exchange Software cable types
Cable type
Description
Velocity
(Vf %)
Attn.
(dB/
100m)
Dielec.
ANAVA5-50
AVA5-50 7/8"
91.00
5.530
1.21
ANAVA7-50
AVA7-50 1 5/
8"
92.00
3.360
1.18
ANEFX2-50
EFX2-50
85.00
17.800
1.38
ANFSJ150A
FSJ1-50A
84.00
28.500
1.42
ANFSJ2-50
FSJ2-50
83.00
19.600
1.45
ANFSJ450B
FSJ4-50B
81.00
17.600
1.52
ANHJ12-50
HJ12-50
93.10
2.890
1.15
ANHJ45-50
HJ4.5-50
92.00
7.860
1.18
ANHJ4-50
HJ4-50
91.40
13.700
1.20
ANHJ5-50
HJ5-50
91.60
6.260
1.19
ANHJ7-50A
HJ7-50A
92.10
3.420
1.18
ANHL4RP50
HL4RP-50
88.00
12.200
1.29
ANLDF1250
LDF12-50
88.00
3.260
1.29
ANLDF1-50
LDF1-50
86.00
20.000
1.35
ANLDF2-50
LDF2-50
88.00
17.000
1.29
ANLDF4550A
LDF4.5-50A
89.00
8.020
1.26
ANLDF450A
LDF4-50A
88.00
10.700
1.29
ANLDF550A
LDF5-50A
89.00
6.110
1.26
ANLDF550B
LDF5-50B
91.00
6.100
1.21
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
217
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
Table 4
218
9100 Data Exchange Software cable types (Continued)
Cable type
Description
Velocity
(Vf %)
Attn.
(dB/
100m)
Dielec.
ANLDF6-50
LDF6-50
89.00
4.430
1.26
ANLDF750A
LDF7-50A
88.00
3.710
1.29
ANVXL5-50
VXL5-50
88.00
6.590
1.29
ANVXL55078
VXL5-50 7/8"
88.00
6.590
1.29
ANVXL6-50
VXL6-50
88.00
4.830
1.29
ANVXL6-50
VXL6-50 1 1/
4"
88.00
4.830
1.29
ANVXL7-50
VXL7-50
88.00
3.710
1.29
BERG10
RG10
65.90
26.201
2.30
BERG10A
RG10A
65.90
26.201
2.30
BERG142
RG142
65.90
44.300
2.30
BERG17
RG17
65.90
18.000
2.30
BERG174
RG174
65.90
98.400
2.30
BERG178B
RG178B
65.90
150.900
2.30
BERG17A
RG17A
65.90
18.000
2.30
BERG188
RG188
65.90
101.700
2.30
BERG213
RG213
65.90
29.200
2.30
BERG214
RG214
65.90
29.200
2.30
BERG223
RG223
65.90
53.500
2.30
BERG55
RG55
65.90
54.100
2.30
BERG55A
RG55A
65.90
54.100
2.30
BERG55B
RG55B
65.90
54.100
2.30
BERG58
RG58
65.90
55.800
2.30
BERG58A
RG58A
66.00
55.900
2.30
BERG58B
RG58B
65.90
78.700
2.30
BERG58C
RG58C
65.90
78.700
2.30
BERG8
RG8
65.90
26.201
2.30
BERG8A
RG8A
65.90
26.201
2.30
BERG9
RG9
65.90
28.900
2.30
BERG9A
RG9A
65.90
28.900
2.30
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
Table 4
9100 Data Exchange Software cable types (Continued)
Cable type
Description
Velocity
(Vf %)
Attn.
(dB/
100m)
Dielec.
CSCR50107
0
CR50 1070PE
88.00
5.510
1.29
CSCR50187
3
CR50 1873PE
88.00
3.440
1.29
CSCR50540
CR50 540PE
88.00
10.300
1.29
EUEC12-50
EC12-50 2-1/
4
88.00
3.370
1.29
EUEC1-50
EC1-50 1/4
82.00
20.980
1.49
EUEC1-50HF
EC1-50-HF 1/
4
83.00
26.890
1.45
EUEC2-50
EC2-50 3/8
88.00
15.100
1.29
EUEC45-50
EC4.5-50 5/8
88.00
8.150
1.29
EUEC4-50
EC4-50 1/2
88.00
10.880
1.29
EUEC4-50HF
EC4-50-HF 1/
2
82.00
16.080
1.49
EUEC5-50
EC5-50 7/8
88.00
6.100
1.29
EUEC6-50
EC6-50 1-1/4
88.00
4.510
1.29
EUEC7-50
EC7-50 1-5/8
88.00
3.810
1.29
NKRF11450
RF 1 1/4"-50
88.00
4.290
1.29
NKRF15850
RF 1 5/8"-50
88.00
3.630
1.29
NKRF12-50
RF 1/2"-50
88.00
10.700
1.29
NKRF21450
RF 2 1/4"-50
88.00
3.220
1.29
NKRF38-50
RF 3/8"-50
86.00
16.200
1.35
NKRF58-50
RF 5/8"-50
88.00
7.460
1.29
NKRF78-50
RF 7/8"-50
88.00
5.850
1.29
NKRFE11450
RFE 1 1/4"50
88.00
4.440
1.29
NKRFE15850
RFE 1 5/8"50
88.00
3.680
1.29
NKRFE7850
RFE 7/8"-50
84.00
6.290
1.42
NKRFF1250
RFF 1/2"-50
82.00
15.700
1.49
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
219
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
Table 4
220
9100 Data Exchange Software cable types (Continued)
Cable type
Description
Velocity
(Vf %)
Attn.
(dB/
100m)
Dielec.
NKRFF1450
RFF 1/4"-50
83.00
27.200
1.45
NKRFF3850
RFF 3/8"-50
81.00
20.900
1.52
RFHCA11850
HCA118-50
92.00
4.550
1.18
RFHCA1250
HCA12-50
93.00
11.100
1.16
RFHCA15850
HCA158-50
95.00
2.890
1.11
RFHCA21450
HCA214-50
95.00
2.880
1.11
RFHCA30050
HCA300-50
96.00
1.483
1.09
RFHCA31850
HCA318-50
96.00
1.260
1.09
RFHCA3850
HCA38-50
89.00
13.200
1.26
RFHCA41850
HCA418-50
97.00
0.957
1.06
RFHCA5850
HCA58-50
92.00
8.180
1.18
RFHCA7850
HCA78-50
93.00
5.750
1.16
RFHF4-18
HF 4-1/8"
Cu2Y
97.00
1.000
1.06
RFHF5
HF 5" Cu2Y
96.00
0.700
1.09
RFHF6-18
HF 6-1/8"
Cu2Y
97.00
0.600
1.06
RFLCF12-50
LCF12-50
88.00
10.500
1.29
RFLCF14-50
LCF14-50
83.00
20.200
1.45
RFLCF15850
LCF158-50A
89.00
3.640
1.26
RFLCF21450
LCF214-50A
88.00
3.260
1.29
RFLCF38-50
LCF38-50
88.00
16.500
1.29
RFLCF58-50
LCF58-50
88.00
8.260
1.29
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
Table 4
9100 Data Exchange Software cable types (Continued)
Cable type
Description
Velocity
(Vf %)
Attn.
(dB/
100m)
Dielec.
RFLCF7850A
LCF78-50A
89.00
5.820
1.26
RFLCFS114
LCFS114-50A
89.00
4.420
1.26
RFSCF11450
SCF114-50A
89.00
4.720
1.26
RFSCF12-50
SCF12-50
82.00
16.400
1.49
RFSCF14-50
SCF14-50
82.00
28.500
1.49
RFSCF38-50
SCF38-50
82.00
20.600
1.49
RFSCF7850A
SCF78-50A
88.00
6.160
1.29
TMLMR100
A
LMR100A
66.00
115.463
2.30
TMLMR120
0
LMR1200
88.00
6.532
1.29
TMLMR170
0
LMR1700
89.00
4.931
1.26
TMLMR195
LMR195
80.00
55.443
1.56
TMLMR200
LMR200
83.00
49.249
1.45
TMLMR240
LMR240
84.00
37.684
1.42
TMLMR300
LMR300
85.00
30.325
1.38
TMLMR400
LMR400
85.00
19.646
1.38
TMLMR500
LMR500
86.00
15.876
1.35
TMLMR600
LMR600
87.00
12.789
1.32
TMLMR900
LMR900
87.00
8.645
1.32
310801
310801
82.10
11.500
1.48
311201
311201
82.00
18.000
1.49
311501
311501
80.00
23,000
1.56
311601
311601
80,00
26.200
1.56
311901
311901
80.00
37.700
1.56
352001
352001
80.00
37.700
1.56
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
221
Appendix B Predefined Settings
Predefined cable types
222
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix C
Menu Structure
C
This appendix provides an overview of the menu structure of the 9101
Handheld Spectrum Analyzer.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
223
Appendix C Menu Structure
Mode function key menus
Mode function key menus
224
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix C Menu Structure
Application menus
Application menus
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
225
Appendix C Menu Structure
Application menus
226
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix D
Software License
D
This chapter contains the license conditions for use of the 9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer and the 9100 Data Exchange Software.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
227
Appendix D Software License
End-user license agreement
End-user license agreement
All copyrights in and to the software product are owned by Aeroflex
Communications or its licensors. The software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
This end-user license agreement grants you the right to use the software contained in this product subject to the following restrictions. You
may not:
(i) use the software and/or any copy of the software in different
computers concurrently, unless the software is an update that has
been downloaded from the Internet at aeroflex.com;
(ii) copy the software, except for archive purposes consistent with
your standard archive procedures;
(iii) transfer the software to a third party apart from the entire
product;
(iv) modify, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer or otherwise
attempt to derive the source code of the software;
(v) export the software in contravention of applicable export laws
and regulations of the country of purchase;
(vi) use the software other than in connection with operation of the
product.
The licensor's suppliers do not make or pass on to end users or any
other third party, any express, implied or statutory warranty or representation on behalf of such suppliers, including but not limited to the
implied warranties of noninfringement, title, merchantability or fitness
for a particular purpose.
Aeroflex shall not be held liable for any damages suffered or incurred
by you or any other third party (including, but not limited to, general,
special, consequential or incidental damages including damages for
loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information and the like), arising out of or in connection with the delivery, use
or performance of the software.
228
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix E
Warranty and Repair
E
This chapter describes the customer services available through Aeroflex. Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:
– “Warranty information” on page 230
– “Equipment return instructions” on page 231
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
229
Appendix E Warranty and Repair
Warranty information
Warranty information
Aeroflex warrants that all of its products conform to Aeroflex's
published specifications and are free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one year from the date of delivery to the
original buyer, when used under normal operating conditions and
within the service conditions for which they were designed. This
warranty is not transferable and does not apply to used or demonstration products.
In case of a warranty claim, Aeroflex's obligation shall be limited to
repairing, or at its option, replacing without charge, any assembly or
component (except batteries) which in Aeroflex’s sole opinion proves
to be defective within the scope of the warranty. In the event Aeroflex
is not able to modify, repair or replace nonconforming defective parts
or components to a condition as warranted within a reasonable time
after receipt thereof, the buyer shall receive credit in the amount of the
original invoiced price of the product.
It is the buyer's responsibility to notify Aeroflex in writing of the defect
or nonconformity within the warranty period and to return the affected
product to Aeroflex’s factory, designated service provider, or authorized service center within thirty (30) days after discovery of such
defect or nonconformity. The buyer shall prepay shipping charges and
insurance for products returned to Aeroflex or its designated service
provider for warranty service. Aeroflex or its designated service
provider shall pay costs for return of products to the buyer.
Aeroflex’s obligation and the customer’s sole remedy under this hardware warranty is limited to the repair or replacement, at Aeroflex’s
option, of the defective product. Aeroflex shall have no obligation to
remedy any such defect if it can be shown: (a) that the product was
altered, repaired, or reworked by any party other than Aeroflex without
Aeroflex’s written consent; (b) that such defects were the result of
customer’s improper storage, mishandling, abuse, or misuse of the
product; (c) that such defects were the result of customer’s use of the
product in conjunction with equipment electronically or mechanically
incompatible or of an inferior quality; or (d) that the defect was the
result of damage by fire, explosion, power failure, or any act of nature.
The warranty described above is the buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy
and no other warranty, whether written or oral, expressed or implied by
statute or course of dealing shall apply. Aeroflex specifically disclaims
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. No statement, representation, agreement, or understanding,
oral or written, made by an agent, distributor, or employee of Aeroflex,
which is not contained in the foregoing warranty will be binding upon
Aeroflex, unless made in writing and executed by an authorized representative of Aeroflex. Under no circumstances shall Aeroflex be liable
for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages,
expenses, or losses, including loss of profits, based on contract, tort, or
any other legal theory.
230
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Appendix E Warranty and Repair
Equipment return instructions
Equipment return instructions
Please contact your local service center for Aeroflex products via telephone or web site for return or reference authorization to accompany
your equipment. For each piece of equipment returned for repair,
attach a tag that includes the following information:
– Owner’s name, address, and telephone number.
– Serial number, product type, and model.
– Warranty status. (If you are unsure of the warranty status of your
instrument, include a copy of the invoice or delivery note.)
– Detailed description of the problem or service requested.
– Name and telephone number of the person to contact regarding
questions about the repair.
– Return authorization (RA) number or reference number.
If possible, return the equipment using the original shipping container
and material. Additional Aeroflex shipping containers are available
from Aeroflex on request. If the original container is not available, the
unit should be carefully packed so that it will not be damaged in transit.
Aeroflex is not liable for any damage that may occur during shipping.
The customer should clearly mark the Aeroflex-issued RA or reference
number on the outside of the package and ship it prepaid and insured
to Aeroflex.
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
231
Appendix E Warranty and Repair
Equipment return instructions
232
9101 Handheld Spectrum Analyzer
Software version 5.31
Numerics
9100 Data Exchange Software 167–194
connecting PC and the instrument 170
copying configuration files 194
creating screen shots 179
directory structure 191
external coupling factor definition 188
external device compensation 187
file management 191
File Manager 192
file types 191
license information 227
limit templates 183
loading a trace file on the PC 175
loading external coupling loss files 188
loading measurement results from the instrument 171
managing communication systems 189
predefined cable types 217
predefined channel power communication systems 214
printing results 175
saving results on the PC 175
working with measurement results 180
working with settings 190
A
Accessories 6
ACPR see also Adjacent channel power ratio
Actual trace mode 62, 88
Adjacent channel power ratio 69
Application examples 211
Attenuation 54, 85
Average trace mode 62, 88
B
Backspace key 21
Battery status 13
C
Calibration information 35
Calibration Information menu 35
Cent function key 19
Center frequency 51
Channel power 69
level settings 84
Channel power measurements
managing communication systems 189
Channel power mode 75–95
adding trace B to trace A 91
changing the occupied bandwidth 81
changing the sweep time 84
compensating gains and losses 86
copying traces 92
deleting traces 94
external device compensation 86
reading the channel power 81
reference level 85
selecting the trace mode 88
setting up the trace 88
storing and loading traces 93
subtracting trace B from trace A 90
trace detectors 91
traces 88
turning the second trace on and off 90
viewing parameters 95
working with communication systems 81
Clr Trc function key 19
Communication systems 81–84
usage in channel power mode 81
Connectors 10
Copying traces 66, 92
Cursor keys 20
D
Date and time settings
adjustment 38
DC in connector 10
Deleting traces 68, 94
Device name
assigning a device name to the instrument 38
Direct printing 33
Display
changing the brightness 36
horizontal axis 15
icons 15
input field 18
Marker field 17
sections 14
selecting the user interface colors 43
softkey descriptions 18
trace finder 17
vertical axis 15
Display brightness 36
E
Enter keys
Enter 21
GHz/dBM 21
kHz/dBμV/m 21
MHz/dB/μs 21
Entering numbers and text 23
Errors see also Troubleshooting
Escape key 21
External device compensation 55, 86
defining and saving parameter files 187
external coupling factor definition 188
F
Factory settings
restoring defaults for all modes 47
File Manager 192
Frequency
center frequency 51
span 51
Start and stop 51
Frequency menu
spectrum analysis 50
Frequency range 50
Frequency settings 50
Frequency step size 52
Front panel 13–25
entering numbers and text 23
function keys 18
keypad 18
usage 13
Full span 52
Function keys
Cent 19
Clr Trc 19
Hold/Run 19
Mkr 20
Mode 19
Param 19
Preset 19
RCL/Store 19
Ref 19
Span 19
Function softkeys 22
G
Gains and losses
compensation 55, 86
General settings 34–45
calibration information 35
date and time 38
device name 38
display brightness 36
instrument IP address 40
instrument IP port 42
options 36
PC IP address 42
RS-232 port baud rate 39
serial number 34
software version number 34
user interface colors 43
warning and error beeps 37
General Settings menu 39
GHz/dBM enter key 21
H
Handling errors and problems see also Troubleshooting
Hardware attenuation 54, 85
Hold trace mode 62, 88
Hold/Run function key 19
I
Icons 15
Input
acoustical reaction 24
numbers and text 23
Input field 14, 18
Installing options 36
IP address configuration 40, 42
IP port 42
K
Keypad 18
Keys
Backspace key 21
cursor keys 20
enter keys 21
Escape key 21
function keys 18
numeric keys 20
Print key 20
softkeys 21
kHz/dBμV/m enter key 21
L
LAN connector 12
Level
selecting unit for input and output 55, 86
Level settings 54, 84
Limit lines
usage 29
Limit templates 31, 183
changing limit lines 185
defining limits 184
loading a template 186
storing a template 185
transfer 186
M
Marker field 14, 17
Markers 26–29
disabling a marker 27
enabling a delta marker 27
enabling and moving a marker 26
working with 26–29
Max hold trace mode 62, 88
Measurement mode selection 25, 79
Measurement type 71
Menu softkeys 22
Menu structure 223
Menus
Calibration Information 35
General Settings 39
Setup Application Software Menu 100
Spectrum Analysis Frequency menu 50
System Information 34
TCP/IP Configuration 43
Trace Function menu 66, 67, 73
Trigger menu 58, 59
MHz/dB/μs enter key 21
Min hold trace mode 62, 88
Mkr function key 20
Mode function key 19
Mode selection 25, 79
Modes
channel power 75
restoring factory settings for all modes 47
spectrum analysis 49
N
Numeric keys 20
O
OBW see also Occupied bandwidth
Occupied bandwidth 69
Options 6, 36
installing a new option 36
P
Param function key 19
Power switch 13
Predefined settings
cable types 217
channel power communcation systems 213
measurement settings 212
Preset function key 19
Print key 20
Printer configuration 43
Printing screens 33
R
RBW see also Resolution bandwidth
RCL/Store function key 19
Ref function key 19
Reference level 54, 85
Resolution bandwidth 53
Restoring factory settings 47
Results area 14
RF in connector 10
RS-232 configuration 39
S
Safety warnings xvi
Scale 55, 86
SCPI commands 105–165
application examples 204
Calculate 151
Display 148
Format 158
general 106
Input 133
Instrument 147
MMemory 135
programming examples 195
Sense 119
Service 159
System 112
SCPI error messages 163
Selecting modes
channel power 79
Selecting the measurement type 71
Serial (RS-232) connector 12
Serial number 34
Settings
storing 45
working with stored settings 45
Setup Application Software Menu 100
Softkey descriptions 14, 18
Softkeys
horizontal (menu) softkeys 22
vertical (function) softkeys 22
Software license 227–228
Software update 99–104
LAN 103
serial 101
setting a password for updates 100
Software version number 34
Span 51
Span function key 19
Special functions
demodulating AM or FM signals 60
limiting the number of measurements 60
Special spectrum analysis measurement functions 69–71
adjacent channel power ratio 69
channel power 69
occupied bandwidth 69
switching special measurement functions off 71
Spectrum analysis 49
Spectrum analysis mode 49–73
adding trace B to trace A 64
changing the vertical scale 55, 86
compensating gains and losses 55
copying traces 66
defining the number of measurements for averaging 65, 91
deleting traces 68
external device compensation 55
frequency range 50
frequency settings 50
full span 52
level settings 54
reference level 54
selecting step size for frequency input 52
selecting the trace mode 62
setting the attenuation 54, 85
setting up the trace 61
special functions 58
storing and loading traces 67
subtracting trace B from trace A 63
trace detector 65
traces 61
turning the second trace on and off 63
viewing parameters 73
Storing and loading traces 67, 93
Storing settings 45
Sweep time 53
Switching special measurement functions off 71
Switching the instrument on 13
SWT see also Sweep time
Symbols 15
System Information Menu 34
T
TCP/IP configuration 40, 42
TCP/IP Configuration menu 43
Trace finder 17
Trace Function Menu 66, 67, 73
Trace modes
Actual 62, 88
Average 62, 88
Hold 62, 88
Max hold 62, 88
Min hold 62, 88
Traces
adding trace B to trace A 64, 91
copying traces 66, 92
defining the number of measurements for averaging 65, 91
deleting traces 68, 94
selecting the detection method 65, 91
storing and loading traces 67, 93
subtracting trace B from trace A 63, 90
trace detectors 65, 91
turning the second trace on and off 63, 90
Trigger menu 58, 59
Triggering
external trigger 59
video trigger 58
Troubleshooting 97–98
V
VBW see also Video bandwidth
Vertical scale 55, 86
Video bandwidth 53
Video Trigger 58
Viewing parameters 73, 95
W
Warranty information 229
Publication History
Revision
Comment
0303-100-A
First revision.
0312-210-A
Redesigned user interface; channel power measurements,
AM/FM demodulation, video trigger, limit template, additional marker functions added.
0404-220-A
New features of software version 2.20; new chapters Spectrum Analysis and Channel Power Operation, Menu Structure, Typical Application Examples.
0406-221-A
Additional battery icons; IP address of PC not required; maximum input power level must not exceed 30 dBm at any
attenuator setting.
0409-221-A
New chapters: Updating the Application Software and Troubleshooting.
0502-300-A
New features of software version 3.00: Factory Settings,
Trace Function features, Calibration Information menu. System information menu descriptions modified according to
feature enhancements. Description of delta marker handling
modified according to feature enhancements. Measure menu
modifications incorporated.
0601-401-A
New features of software version 4.01: Six markers, direct
print mode, RMS detector. Several improvements on different menus.
0608-450-A
Minor corrections.
0612-500-A
New features of software version 5.00: improvements of the
9100 Data Exchange Software.
0709-510-A
External trigger support.
1101-531-A
New company name.
Aeroflex and its logo are trademarks of Aeroflex Incorporated. All other trademarks
and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Specifications, terms and conditions are subject to change without notice.
© Copyright 2010 Aeroflex GmbH. All rights reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means (printing, photocopying or any other method) without the express written
permission of Aeroflex.
Manual ident: AG 290 004
Manual version: 1101-531-A
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement